JP7297723B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes games.

Patent Literature 1 discloses a game machine capable of reducing the amount of anti-noise electronic components used and reducing costs by increasing the anti-noise performance of the game control board itself.

JP-A-8-052257

Elements constituting a circuit are required to be less likely to be affected by, or to be subject to, electromagnetic influence such as noise. In addition, there is a demand for a gaming machine that reduces the burden on the player and reduces the player's fatigue. Furthermore, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can ensure fair play without affecting fair play.

Therefore, the present invention is intended to make it difficult for the elements that make up the circuit to be affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise, to reduce the player's fatigue, to reduce the burden on the player, and to contribute to a fair game. To provide a game machine capable of ensuring fair play without affecting the game.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. It should be noted that the following solutions and words in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these. Further, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of the invention-specifying matters shown in the following means for solving the problem. Furthermore, each of the matters specifying the invention shown in the following solutions can be converted into a higher-level concept by adding elements that limit the matters specifying the invention, or by deleting elements that limit the matters specifying the invention. .

Solution A1: The gaming machine of this solution comprises a substrate on which a plurality of circuit elements including at least control elements and a wiring pattern including at least signal lines electrically connecting the circuit elements are mounted, The signal line includes at least a first signal line through which a first signal passes, and a second signal line through which a second signal passes, unlike the first signal line. The signal is different from the first signal in at least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency, and the wiring pattern is arranged at least partially around the second signal line. It is a game machine equipped with a ground pattern.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A substrate is provided on which a plurality of circuit elements including at least control elements and a wiring pattern including at least signal lines for electrically connecting the circuit elements are mounted. The control elements are a control IC, an output side IC, a receiving side IC, a control CPU, and the like. Circuit elements are ICs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, circuits, resistors, capacitors, and the like. A wiring pattern is a member that includes at least signal lines that electrically connect circuit elements of a plurality of circuit elements.
(2) The signal line in (1) includes at least a first signal line through which the first signal passes and a second signal line through which the second signal passes, unlike the first signal line. include.
(3) The second signal of (2) above differs from the first signal of (2) above in at least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency. The second signal is, for example, a specific signal that satisfies at least one of a signal importance condition, a signal frequency condition, and a signal update frequency (communication frequency) condition. The first signal is, for example, a non-specific signal that does not satisfy any of the above conditions.
A specific signal that satisfies the condition regarding the degree of signal importance is a signal that has a high degree of importance in controlling the gaming machine (for example, a command data signal, a reset signal). A specific signal that satisfies the signal frequency condition is a high-speed signal (eg, a clock signal). A specific signal that satisfies the signal update frequency condition is a signal that is frequently updated (eg, a command data signal).
(4) The wiring pattern of (1) above includes a ground pattern arranged at least partially around the second signal line. The ground may be written as ground or GND. The ground includes a solid ground, a ground line, a solid wiring pattern, and the like.

According to this solution, since the ground pattern is arranged at least partly around the second signal line, it is possible to reduce the influence of noise generated by the second signal line on other signal lines. In addition, the second signal line can be made less susceptible to the influence of noise emitted by other signal lines, and as a result, the elements that make up the circuit are less likely to be affected by electromagnetic effects such as noise. machine can be provided.

Solution A2: The game machine of the present solution means is any one of the above-described solution means, wherein the ground pattern and the second signal line are arranged in parallel at least partially on the substrate. , the width of the ground pattern in the short direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction is equal to the width in the short direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the second signal line or the width of the second signal line in the short direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction This game machine is characterized by being wider than the width in the hand direction.

In this means for solving the problem, the ground pattern and the second signal line are at least partially arranged parallel to each other (for example, adjacent to each other) on the substrate, and the width of the ground pattern (the width in the lateral direction is width) is equal to or wider than the width of the second signal line (the width in the lateral direction).

According to this means for solving the problem, the ground pattern and the second signal line are arranged side by side in at least a part thereof in parallel on the substrate, so that they are easily affected by noise. is equal to or wider than the width of the second signal line, so noise is further reduced compared to the case where the width of the ground pattern is narrower than the width of the second signal line. You can limit the impact.

Other Solution Means: The game machine of this solution means is any one of the above solution means, wherein the second signal line is a signal line for a clock signal, a command data signal, or a reset signal. It is a gaming machine characterized by

In this solution, the second signal line is a signal line for a clock signal, a command data signal or a reset signal.
The second signal line has a particularly high degree of importance. A clock signal with a high frequency and a source of noise, a command data signal with a high update frequency, and noise, etc., have a large impact on the entire system (update frequency is low). ) is the signal line through which the reset signal passes.

According to this means for solving the problem, it is possible to protect the signal line or the like, which has a high degree of importance, so that the quality of the game machine can be improved.

Solution B1: In the game machine of this solution, the substrate includes an output side element that outputs a predetermined signal, a receiving side element that receives the predetermined signal, and the output side element and the receiving side element. A transmission line electrically connected to transmit the predetermined signal is arranged, a circuit element for reducing noise generated from the transmission line is arranged on the transmission line, and from the output side element to the circuit element is shorter than the distance from the receiving element to the circuit element.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) On the board, an output side element that outputs a predetermined signal, a receiving side element that receives the predetermined signal, and an output side element and a receiving side element are electrically connected to transmit the predetermined signal. A transmission line is arranged. The substrate may be one substrate or multiple substrates. The board is, for example, a main control board, an effect control board, a driver control board, or the like. The output side element is a control IC, a control CPU, or the like. The receiving element is a control IC, a control CPU, or the like. The output side element and the receiving side element may be arranged on the same substrate or may be arranged on different substrates. The transmission line is, for example, a wiring, a pattern for transmitting a power signal, or the like, and may be arranged on the substrate, or may be a harness or the like that connects the substrates.
(2) A circuit element for reducing noise generated from the transmission line of (1) is arranged in the transmission line of (1). Circuit elements are damping resistors, noise filters, ferrite beads, and the like.

(3) The distance (L1) from the output element (1) to the circuit element (2) is the distance (L2) from the receiving element (1) to the circuit element (2). ) (L1<L2).

According to this solution, since the circuit element is arranged on the transmission line, the electromagnetic influence on other wiring and other circuits can be suppressed as much as possible, preventing malfunction of the entire circuit of the game machine, A stable operation can be ensured, and as a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to be affected by, or less susceptible to, electromagnetic influences such as noise in the elements that make up the circuit.

Further, according to this solution, the distance (L1) from the output side element to the circuit element is shorter than the distance (L2) from the receiving side element to the circuit element (L1<L2). It is possible to shorten the portion where it is difficult to generate noise and lengthen the portion where the effect of the circuit element is likely to occur, thereby efficiently suppressing the influence of noise.

Solution Means F1-1: The game machine of this solution means comprises a game board on which a game area having a first game area and a second game area is formed, and an operating means rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position. and a substrate provided on the game board, on which are mounted a plurality of circuit elements including at least control elements, and a wiring pattern including at least signal lines for electrically connecting the circuit elements; The signal line includes at least a first signal line through which a first signal passes, and a second signal line through which a second signal passes, which is different from the first signal line. is different from the first signal in at least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency, and the wiring pattern is arranged at least partially around the second signal line A ground pattern is provided, and when the operating means is rotated to the predetermined reference position, a game medium is shot to the first game area, and when the operating means is rotated to the maximum position, the second A first operation torque is defined as an operation torque required for starting the rotation of the operation means from the initial position when the game medium is shot into the game area, and the operation means is moved from the initial position to the predetermined reference position. Assuming that an operation torque required for rotation is a second operation torque, and an operation torque required to rotate the operation means from the initial position to the maximum position is a third operation torque, the second operation torque is The game machine is characterized in that the third operation torque is larger than the first operation torque and is larger than the second operation torque and is less than or equal to twice the second operation torque.

According to this solution, since the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small, the distance from the predetermined reference position (left-handed reference position) to the maximum position (right-handed reference position, maximum rotation position) The operation torque does not suddenly increase, and the player feels that the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
In addition, according to this means for solving the problem, it is possible to make the elements constituting the circuit less likely to be affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise or to be less likely to receive such influences, and to reduce the player's fatigue and reduce the burden on the player. It is possible to secure a fair game without affecting the fair game. It should be noted that the feature of each of the above-described solving means can be added to this solving means.

Solution Means F1-2: The game machine of this solution means comprises a game board on which a game area having a first game area and a second game area is formed, and an operation means rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position. and an output side element provided on the game board for outputting a predetermined signal, a receiving side element for receiving the predetermined signal, and electrically connecting the output side element and the receiving side element, and a substrate on which a transmission line for transmitting a predetermined signal is mounted, wherein a circuit element for reducing noise generated from the transmission line is arranged on the transmission line, and the output side element to the circuit element is arranged. The distance is shorter than the distance from the receiving side element to the circuit element, and when the operation means is rotated to the predetermined reference position, the game medium is shot to the first game area and the When the operation means is rotated to the maximum position, the game medium is shot to the second game area, and the operation torque required to start rotating the operation means from the initial position is applied to the first operation. and a second operation torque is an operation torque required to rotate the operation means from the initial position to the predetermined reference position, and an operation required to rotate the operation means from the initial position to the maximum position. Assuming that the torque is a third operation torque, the second operation torque is greater than the first operation torque, the third operation torque is greater than the second operation torque, and is not more than twice the second operation torque. This is a game machine characterized by:

According to this solution, since the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small, the distance from the predetermined reference position (left-handed reference position) to the maximum position (right-handed reference position, maximum rotation position) The operation torque does not suddenly increase, and the player feels that the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
In addition, according to this means for solving the problem, it is possible to make the elements constituting the circuit less likely to be affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise or to be less likely to receive such influences, and to reduce the player's fatigue and reduce the burden on the player. It is possible to secure a fair game without affecting the fair game. It should be noted that the feature of each of the above-described solving means can be added to this solving means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the elements that make up the circuit less likely to be affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise or to be less likely to be affected by them, while making it possible to prevent the player from getting tired and reduce the burden on the player, thereby contributing to a fair game. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of ensuring fair play without any influence.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram explaining a ground pattern; FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram explaining a ground pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a signal line is entirely surrounded by a ground pattern; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a signal line is partially surrounded by a ground pattern; This is an example of arranging a ground pattern for each of a plurality of signal lines. FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram explaining a damping resistor; FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram explaining a damping resistor; It is a diagram showing the relationship between the setting and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. 10 is a flowchart (1/2) showing an example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing; 10 is a flowchart (2/2) showing an example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of save processing at power-off; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command reception interrupt processing; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of timer interrupt processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of switch input event processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st special design memory|storage update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 2nd special design memory|storage update process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect determination processing at the time of acquisition; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a special symbol game process. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning device. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern selection table at loss; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 1st special design big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of special design storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process during a special design stop display. 6 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of display output management processing; It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable prize-winning apparatus management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbols" or "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2" in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "10 round probability variation patterns" or "6 round probability variation patterns 1 and 2" in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of effect images corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of super ready-to-win production executed during the variable display of special symbols. It is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the production during the big role when it corresponds to "8 round normal pattern" or "8 round probability variable pattern 1, 2" (1/4). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of the production during the big role when it corresponds to "8 round normal pattern" or "8 round probability variable pattern 1, 2" (2/4). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of the production during the big role when it corresponds to "8 round normal pattern" or "8 round probability variable pattern 1, 2" (3/4). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of the production during the big role when it corresponds to "8 round normal pattern" or "8 round probability variable pattern 1, 2" (4/4). FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a fireworks rush effect; It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of the production during the big role that is executed during the big hit game when it corresponds to the "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or the like. It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of an effect during a big role executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "10 rounds probability variation pattern". FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a coast mode effect; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production|presentation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design change pre-processing. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. It is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of other embodiment. It is a front view showing a game board unit of another embodiment alone. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 61; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outer rail; It is a figure which shows a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball contacts an outer rail. It is a figure which shows an outer rail and a game board. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 0 degrees (minimum angle); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 100 degrees (maximum angle); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 1). FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 2).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. can be converted into a game value based on the number of Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.

Here, in this specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated facing the pachinko machine 1 is defined as left, the right side as viewed from the player is defined as right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is defined as up. The lower side viewed from the player is referred to as the bottom, the near side viewed from the player is referred to as the front, and the back side viewed from the player is referred to as the rear.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 (left edge in FIG. 2) as viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side locks the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the lock. It disables the opening of 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7, for example, with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (game area where game balls flow down, board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

[Structure of ball plate]
The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores the game balls that have been put out while the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are received from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6c) is paid out.

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit is displayed on this frequency display section. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. Although the example of the model connected to the card unit is described in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

On the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is provided in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. In addition, the player can drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by pushing the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e backward. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . A player can operate the shooting control board set 174 by operating the handle unit 16 to shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The configuration inside the game area 8a will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper side of the tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate an upper glass frame speaker 54, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each incorporate an in-glass frame speaker 55. is built in. On the other hand, an inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and an outer frame speaker 56 is installed in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, and 58 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

[Operation member]
An operation unit 60 (operating means) is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 so as to protrude from the upper tray 6b toward the upper front side. The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in its central portion and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64 . The operation unit 60 is capable of receiving operations in various scenes shown on the production. The player pulls the handle lever 62 toward the front side in one scene of the performance, and pushes the push button 64 in another scene. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbols are changing, the big win is being confirmed, or the big win is being displayed. During the game, it is possible to generate some kind of effects (announcement effects, variable probability promotion effects, promotion effects during big roles, etc.).

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64 . Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped part 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pull-in operation of the handle lever 62. As shown in FIG. In addition, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells that are separated at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These cells cannot be operated by the player, but they are effectively used to inform the player of the operation method.

When the player is requested to perform some kind of operation, a reduced image representing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . At this time, each cell of the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if it were a lamp, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (effective operation time). be. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. When the remaining time runs out, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on/off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced image displayed on the screen. By switching the lighting/lighting out of the portion 65 in this manner, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is structured so as to protrude greatly upward when a predetermined trigger occurs during the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it protrudes to a height approximately three times higher than normal. Push button 64 has a light source therein. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or in multiple colors, but when it is protruding, it can emit more colorful light to exhibit a strong presence. Such an operation of the push button 64 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

Although the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60 in this embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Moreover, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a directional key 66 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation section 14 . The direction key 66 is composed of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions arranged in a cross shape, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the effect.

[Decoration unit]
A decoration unit 400 is attached to the front upper portion of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁The decoration unit 400 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined attachment member (mechanical mechanism such as screws and hooks). Note that the decoration unit 400 may be one that cannot be removed from the pachinko machine 1 .
The decoration unit 400 (decoration) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light.

The decoration unit 400 includes a main body unit 410 arranged above and a front lamp unit 420 arranged below the main body unit 410 .

The main body unit 410 is a cubic member on which predetermined character information is displayed, and emits light when an LED (glass frame top lamp 46) arranged in the rear integrated door unit 4 emits light.

Also, the front lamp unit 420 is a member in which a hemispherical member is combined with a cylindrical member, and emits light when an LED (board lamp 53) arranged on the rear game board unit 8 emits light.

The cylindrical member is preferably colorless and transparent in order to improve the visibility of the upper ball passage 500, and the hemispherical member is preferably colored and transparent in order to improve the presentation effect.

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176, and a back cover. A unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. Electronic devices will be further described later with reference to other block diagrams (FIGS. 5 and 6).

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main controller in a visible manner in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments that can display decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located on the lower right of the 7 segments. It is Performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM, that is, for initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main control device, and in this embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required to change or refer to the game setting of the pachinko machine 1 .

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

The positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the keyhole 306 for setting keys are merely examples, and can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be arranged outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). , can store game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, hall computer, etc.). and various external information signals representing maintenance status etc. .

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 has a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a substantially circular launch rail (no reference numeral). The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁The left part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left hitting area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (jackpot game state , Small hit game state, low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state, etc.) is used in the second game area (right hitting area, specific area). The left portion of the game area 8a is also used in the high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31 and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning port 26 , and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 . Furthermore, the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the single normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged at the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. there is

A game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters a middle starting prize winning port 26 and normal winning prize ports 22 and 24 in the process of flowing down, passes through a starting gate 20, and is a variable starting prize winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter mainly the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the starting gate 20, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball will enter, the ball will enter the second variable prize winning device 31 during the opening operation, or the ball will enter the normal prize winning opening 24. - 特許庁The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but there are a middle starting winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning opening. A game ball entered into the device 31 is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a game board (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. that constitute the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the left side area (left-handed hitting) in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "left hit") in the area).

On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the variable start-up winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right side of the game area 8a (right-handed area ) (executing the so-called “right-handed hitting”).

In this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, the right start It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole 28a (predetermined ball entry hole) (ordinary electric accessories). The variable start-up winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening/closing member 28b. In the illustrated state, the opening/closing member 28b is in a position (retreat position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning hole 28a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 28b moves to the position (driving position) where the opening/closing member 28b protrudes forward from the board surface, the opening/closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right It becomes possible or easier for the ball to enter the start winning opening 28a). The variable start-up winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start-up prize opening by displacing the opening/closing member so as to fall forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge.

The first variable winning device 30, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win), a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big win game) 5th round or 7th round to 10th round condition, condition that the small winning game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning hole 30b. Make it (special electric accessory, first special entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device (so-called lower attacker) arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is of a type in which the opening/closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state in which it protrudes from the board surface toward the player side. is impossible or difficult (the first big winning hole 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of the ball entering the first big winning hole 30b can be generated.

The second variable winning device 31, like the first variable winning device 30, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode), a predetermined second condition (for example condition that it is the 6th round of the jackpot game) is satisfied, enabling the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b (specific winning hole) (special electric accessory, second special winning ball event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has one opening/closing member 31a, for example. The second variable winning device 31 is of a type in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is impossible or difficult (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible (possible or easy), and can generate the event of the ball entering the second big winning hole 31b.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guiding passage 31c for guiding a game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guiding path 31c extends downward from the second big prize winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends downward to the left, and then extends downward again.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a variable probability region blade member 31d and a variable probability region hole 31e are arranged midstream of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge area) is arranged downstream of the .

A game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is first detected by the second count switch 85 as entering. Here, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variable region blade member 31d rises to guide the game ball to the probability variable region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variable region blade member 31d does not rise, so the game ball passes through the upper part of the probability variable region blade member 31d, It is guided to the outlet 31f.

[Probable variable area (specific area)]
Further, a variable probability region (no reference numeral) is provided inside the variable probability region hole 31e. The variable probability area is an area through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the blade member 31d for the variable probability region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

There is a possibility that the variable probability area blade member 31d will operate during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the variable probability region blade member 31d opens the variable probability region for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closes the variable probability region for a long period of time after closing it for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds). Apply either a long open pattern that opens long (for example, about 20 seconds) or a short open pattern that only opens the probability variable area for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the start of the round. . Which operation pattern to operate the variable probability area blade member 31d can be selected according to the winning pattern. Specifically, a long open pattern for long opening the probability variable area is selected when the probability variable pattern is won, and a short open pattern for short opening the probability variable area is selected when the normal pattern is won.

In addition, the operation pattern of the probability variable region blade member 31d applies only the pattern in which the probability variable region blade member 31d opens long, and when the first variable winning device 30 opens short and the round ends, the probability variable region It is also possible to eliminate the opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time. In addition, since the game ball does not reach the variable probability region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the probability variable region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state is shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state after the big win game ends. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (high-probability time-reduction state). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state shifts to a low probability state after the big win game is over. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (low-probability time-reduction state).

A performance unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from its central position to its right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the production unit 40, and various production images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including production patterns corresponding to special patterns. . Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. - 特許庁Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorations (including movable bodies and light-emitting bodies) are arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) can add decorativeness.

In addition, inside the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, an ornament imitating a butterfly). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. The effect using these movable bodies 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the middle starting winning opening 26 directly below it. .

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not enter (win a prize) in various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32.例文帳に追加In addition, including the game ball entering the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, is driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that are caught are recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

A rear lamp unit 430 is arranged above the game board unit 8 . The rear lamp unit 430 is arranged at a position overlapping the front lamp unit 420 .
An LED (not shown) is arranged in the rear lamp unit 430 as a board lamp, and when the LED is turned on, the front lamp unit 420 emits light.

FIG. 4 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board unit 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). The game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35 and a A game state display device 38 is provided.

Among them, the normal design display device 33 alternately lights two lamps (LEDs), for example, to variably display the normal design, and stops displaying the normal design by lighting or extinguishing the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 by a combination of extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of two lamps (LED), for example. For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to form the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

Each time a game ball passes through the starting gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after increasing one by one in the sense of memorizing that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. (up to 4), and with the passing as a trigger, the display mode changes to the display mode after the decrease by 1 each time the variation of the normal pattern is started. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to change (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol variation has not yet started at that time.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display the fluctuation state and the stop state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by, for example, 7-segment LEDs (with dots), respectively. (symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

In addition, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a are, for example, two lamps (LED) extinguished or lit, depending on the display mode composed of a combination of blinking, each 0 to 4 (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is displayed as 3 in a display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is displayed in a display mode in which both lamps are blinking. 4 are displayed, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing by one in the sense of memorizing that the game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 26 each time the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to a mode (up to 4), and changes to a display mode after decreasing one by one each time the variation of the special symbol is started with the entry ball as a trigger. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a increases by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28, the game ball enters the right starting prize opening 28a. (up to 4), and every time the special symbol starts to change with the entry ball as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters the ball. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if the ball is thrown. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of entering balls whose variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. represents the number of times

The gaming state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, probability variation state display lamp 38d, time saving state display lamp 38e, and firing position designation lamp 38f. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are mounted on one integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8. - 特許庁

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter referred to as "common") for the purpose of controlling switching between lighting and extinguishing. From another point of view, the integrated display board 89 has four commons, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In this embodiment, a dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are driven in sequence at intervals of an interrupt period (for example, 4 ms) on a common basis. Therefore, all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are not driven at the same time.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation, and this main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. there is Note that the main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 .

In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. RWM) 76 or the like is integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit 75 , an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192 , a parallel I/O port 79 , a timer circuit (PTC) 194 and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196 . Among them, the random number circuit 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for judging a big hit in a special symbol lottery or normal symbol lottery. It is input to the main control CPU 72 . The interrupt controller 192 also receives interrupt requests (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I/O port 79, timer circuit 194, and serial communication circuit 196, and processes these interrupt requests. Control based on priority. In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a clock generation circuit (not shown) and a reset controller that monitors various states and generates a reset as necessary. implemented above. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or an inner layer portion). The I/O port of the main controller 70 may be of serial type.

Further, the main controller 70 is provided with a setting change device 300 , a setting key switch 302 and a RAM clear switch 304 . The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes settings by operating the setting change device 300. FIG. The setting change device 300 is a device (setting change means) for switching settings (at least set values of a plurality of stages regarding the probability of winning a special symbol lottery), and is operated by operation of the RAM clear switch 304 or the like. Also, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Furthermore, the operating probability means the probability of displaying a combination of special symbols that will activate the conditional device (that will result in the execution of the jackpot game). The setting key switch 302 is an input device for inputting a signal (ON/OFF) indicating the rotation state of the setting key, which is essential for switching settings, as the setting key is rotated. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the following procedure can be used.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with a special key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7 .
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306, and the setting is performed. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, when the setting key is rotated rightward and the power is turned on while turning on the RAM clear switch 304, the setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to one of a plurality of steps provided in advance.
The set values can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 200.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, lever ON processing is required. A process of rotating in a direction, a process of turning on a setting change confirmation button (not shown), etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In this embodiment, once the desired setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to its original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to its original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) When the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key keyhole 306 . In addition, when the setting value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the gaming state display device 38, and the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears when the setting change is confirmed.
(9) Finally, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is closed. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, a normal game is started.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Setting change status]
When the power is turned on with "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", after RAM is cleared, transition to the state during setting change (setting change state, setting change mode) do.

While the settings are being changed, no display is made on the main display (various lamps included in the game state display device 38), and no game balls can be shot or game balls can be won. Also, on the performance display monitor 200, "rn." Is displayed. Also, when the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1-6. Then, when the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the segment of "-" is extinguished (not displayed) such as "blank (non-display) 1" for the display of the ratio segment.

In this state, if the "inner frame closed state" occurs (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state during setting change is completed, and once the state is changed to the state before the power is turned off, , transitions to a playable state.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as the setting change switch, but the RAM clear switch 304 may not be used as the setting change switch, and a setting change switch may be provided separately.

[Setting confirmation status]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", it shifts to the state of setting confirmation (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode). .

As in the setting change state, in the setting confirmation state, no display is made on the main display, and game balls cannot be shot or game balls can be won. Also, on the performance display monitor, "rn." Setting value is displayed. Note that while the setting is being checked, the setting value does not change even if the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

In this state, if "setting key OFF" and "inner frame closed state" (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of confirming the setting ends, and the power is turned off. After shifting to the previous state, it shifts to the playable state.

In this embodiment, setting confirmation cannot be performed in the playable state, but setting confirmation may be performed in the playable state.

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a middle start winning opening 26, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a middle starting winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the first variable winning apparatus 30 and the second variable winning apparatus 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each starting winning prize port switch 80, 82 is for detecting entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning prize port 26 and the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28a). Also, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of game balls into the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning hole) and counting the number. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of game balls into the second variable prize winning device 31 (second big prize winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the variable probability area switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the variable probability area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

Similarly, the game board unit 8 includes a first winning hole switch 86 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning hole 22 and a second winning hole switch for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning hole 24. 81 are equipped. In addition, for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is exemplified, but for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game ball for each normal winning opening 22 Incoming balls may be detected individually.

In any case, winning detection signals from these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). In addition, due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, the variable area switch 95 Winning detection signals are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, etc. for relaying respective winning detection signals.

The above-described normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted to the display substrate 89 from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 .

A performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87 . The performance display monitor 200 displays the number of winning balls paid out by entering each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening), the out number (out switch) indicating the number of game balls shot into the game area. is a monitor for displaying the base calculated by dividing by the number of game balls detected in . The base is calculated for each section set in advance using a region (non-use region) different from the use region used for control to progress the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are calculated. , are displayed alternately at intervals set in advance. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on control signals from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculated state of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the seven segments.

The game board unit 8 is formed with a merging passage for merging the game balls that have passed through all the winning openings and the out openings, and an out switch can be provided in this merging passage. The out switch detects a game ball passing through the confluence passage, and a detection signal is input to the main controller 70 each time a game ball is detected. Main controller 70 can count the number of out balls based on the detection signal input from the out switch. Since the game balls shot into the game area 8a are always discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the confluence passage, the out switch is the number of shot balls shot into the game area 8a, that is, the game area The number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from 8a can be counted.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, it may be connected to the main controller 70 without the panel relay terminal board 87. , the performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main controller 70 .

In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a variable starting prize winning device 28, a first variable prize winning device 30, a second variable prize winning device 31, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to each upstream of the probability variable region, and a first big prize winning port. A solenoid 90, a second big winning opening solenoid 97 and a variable probability region solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 are operated (excited) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31 ( operation) or move the variable probability area blade member 31d. Control signals for these solenoids 88 , 90 , 97 and 99 are also transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87 .

In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4 and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7 . When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When detecting the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is equipped on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and this payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI integrated with a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) and a payout device board 100 are installed in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172. The payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. there is The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the indicated number of game balls from the prize ball case. let out The paid out game balls are sent to the receiving tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173 .

In addition, for example, a payout road ball disconnect switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102 . Each time the payout motor 102 is driven to actually pay out the prize balls, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 . Also, when the ball runs out at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100 . The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100 . A payout detection switch can be arranged near the payout counting switch 106 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged to the upper tray 6b through the channel unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is filled with game balls, more game balls are paid out as described above. flows into the lower plate 6c. Furthermore, when the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is thereby turned on, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball motions even if a prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out in the RAM 98.例文帳に追加The memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, so even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. .

Also, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing control board 108 and a firing solenoid 110 are installed (ball firing means). Also, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6 . The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the aforementioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the receiving tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the launcher case. Also, the shooting solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the shooting position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. In addition, the shooting interval of game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch . Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (firing handle) from changes in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal therefor. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the receiver unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal plate 118. be done. A drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal plate 118 . When the player operates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength of hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the shooting relay terminal plate 118, and when the card unit is not connected to this game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, the shooting control board is also connected. The drive circuit at 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123 . Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with an indicator (3-digit 7-segment LED) for the frequency display section. In addition, the lending and returning switch board 123 is mounted with switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the returning button 12, respectively. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . In addition, from the card unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when no valuable medium is inserted into the card unit or when the remaining points of the inserted valuable medium become 0, the display circuit of the point display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium ) can also be displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a performance control device 124 (computer for controlling performance) as a control configuration. This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 . The production control device 124 is also equipped with a production control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board, production control board, sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI incorporating a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and eDRAM 131 together with a CPU core (not shown). The performance control device 124 is provided at a position covered by a back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the production control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the production such as the VDP 152, the driver IC 132, the voice IC 134, and the like. Among them, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing a rendering screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . The driver IC 132 includes ICs for controlling devices such as the lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, the movable body motor 57, and the like. Also, the audio IC 134 controls driving of the speakers 54 , 55 , 56 and 58 . The internal functional configuration of such effect control device 124 will be described later in detail with reference to the following diagram.

The production control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other, for example, via a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of commands for various effects (hereinafter referred to as "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Alternatively, a serial format may be adopted in accordance with the hardware configuration of each driver (I/O).

In this embodiment, a sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and driving signals from the driver IC 132 and the audio IC 134 are transmitted via the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52, speakers 54, 55, 56 and 58. In addition to the handle lever 62, the button motor 63, the push button 64 and the direction key 66, the sub-connection board 136 is connected to a volume adjustment switch (not shown). contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136 . Here, an example in which the operation members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given, but when installing the receiving plate decorative board, the operating members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the receiving plate decorative board. may be connected.

The button motor 63 is a stepping motor corresponding to the push button 64, and is driven by an unillustrated operation unit control device that controls the operation unit 60 (switching means). The operation unit control device drives the button motor 63 based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124, thereby setting the push button 64 to either the normal state (initial position) or the projected state (maximum movable position). switch (displace).

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8 , and a movable body motor 57 is connected to this driver board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53 . The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the driver board 138 .

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8 , and its display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 . In addition, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power applied to the backlight of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, a cold cathode tube).

In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7 . This power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.). The power generated by the power control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70 , the payout control device 92 , the performance control device 124 and the inverter board 158 . Further, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the card unit via the terminal board 120 for lending equipment such as game balls. Low-voltage power (for example, DC +5 V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Also, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166 .

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent from the external terminal board 160 to the outside via the payout control device 92. is output to The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72 ) and payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94 ) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160 . Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are counted, for example, by a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. In addition, although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 .

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124. As shown in FIG.
As described above, the performance control device 124 has a role as a performance control processor that controls the performance as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the performance control CPU 126, the performance control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 which are necessary for the performance control device 124 to function as a performance control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs related to the control of effects. The effect control CPU 126 accesses the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and controls the effect by executing a program stored in the control ROM 180 . Watch dog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the assumed time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU126. there is When the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC 188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting the effect control CPU 126. do. As a result, the production control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the performance control device 124 has functions related to performance, such as an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , a lithium battery 186 for supplying backup power to the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184, and peripheral ICs such as an input/output driver and a counter/timer circuit (not shown). The lithium battery 186 stores this power and charges itself while driving power is supplied from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 . The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to a lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the drive power supply from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate until the lithium battery 186 runs out of charge (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even under power-off conditions.

It should be noted that the performance control program is configured to store in the SRAM 182 information on security, monitoring, defects, etc., which should not be easily erased. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the performance control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is recovered (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with investigation of the cause of the trouble. becomes possible.

Normally, the control of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180 includes devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, etc. as described above. Control of production using is included. Broadly speaking, the flow of this effect control can be divided into two stages of "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives the effect command transmitted from the main controller 70 and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect corresponding to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the production control CPU 126 generates instruction data by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 relays between the production control CPU 126 and each device. to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and effect reproduction (screen display, sound output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 etc.) are realized.

In this way, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stages of effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126 . In FIG. 5, the internal resources of the production control CPU 126 are divided into several functional blocks such as the production control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the sound control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, and the input control unit 228. etc. In the following description, each functional block is treated as an operator of control processing.

First, at the stage of the overall control, the effect control section 210 in the effect control CPU 126 is the subject of operation. In addition, at the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the sound control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 according to the device to be controlled is the main operating body. becomes. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the production|presentation control part 210 controls each control device 134,152,198,199 grade|etc., directly.

The performance control device 124 functions as a performance control processor in the stage of overall control, and functions as a performance reproduction processor in the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted, a CGROM (image/audio ROM) 190, an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, An LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199 and a driver IC 132 are provided.

The CGROM 190 stores drawing materials (moving image data) that make up the effect screen and audio materials (audio data) that are output along with the progress of the effect in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing effect images, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 into one chip. Also, the VDP 152 incorporates a VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157 . Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used for decompressing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used for decompressing (decoding) the compressed drawing material. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220 , reads necessary drawing materials from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers them to the VRAM 156 . Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is developed in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data, the effect screen is reproduced.

The sound IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sounds such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during execution of the production, and is integrated with the production control CPU 126 into one chip, similar to the VDP 152 . The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, and a CG bus. The audio IC 134 also incorporates an audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) compressed audio materials. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content sent from the voice control unit 222, and reads necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read voice material is decoded using the voice material decoder 135 on the external DRAM. Stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (with a larger number of channels is also possible). Also, the audio IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56, 58 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls lighting patterns and luminance patterns of various lamps 46 to 53 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 . The LED driver 198 employs an addressing synchronous serial scheme. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the contents of the instruction sent from the lamp control section 224 , and transfers drive data according to this to the driver IC 132 .

The SMC 199 controls the driving pattern of a movable body motor 57 that serves as a drive source for the rendering movable body 40 f provided inside the rendering unit 40 . The SMC 199 is also integrated with the performance control CPU 126 into one chip. The SMC 199 employs a clock synchronous serial method. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content sent from the motor control section 226 and transfers it to the driver IC 132 . Here, the SMC 199 is used only for generating motor drive patterns, but since the SMC 199 can generate not only motor driving patterns but also lamp lighting patterns and luminance patterns, the SMC 199 is used instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible for the SMC 199 to generate both lamp and motor data patterns.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamps and motors based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and SMC 199 . The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty-switches) the drive voltage applied to the various lamps 46 to 53 and the movable body motor 57. By managing the operation, it is possible to realize the effect reproduction using the lamp and the movable body. In addition to the glass-frame top lamp 46 and the glass-frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52, the various lamps include light sources built into each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration/production lamps installed in the game board unit 8. board surface lamp 53 and the like are included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the effect unit 40, or the LED built in the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Also, although an example in which the glass-framed decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer decorative board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass-framed decorative lamp 52 is connected to the saucer electric decoration board. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via.

In addition, the driver IC 132 transfers a contact signal input when an operation member such as the handle lever 62 or the push button 64 is operated by the player to the effect control section 210 via the input control section 228 . The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the content of the effect to be reproduced based on the content of the contact signal transferred.
The above is an example of the configuration relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1 .

7 and 8 are conceptual diagrams explaining the ground pattern. 7 shows an example without a ground pattern, and FIG. 8 shows an example with a ground pattern. Here, first, the ground pattern will be explained. A ground pattern is a pattern for securing a portion where the potential difference from a reference potential is 0 V in an electric circuit or the like. The ground patterns include a signal ground pattern connected to a line pattern common to each circuit, and a frame ground pattern connected to a metallic housing or the like. The ground pattern may be formed on the substrate, or may be formed as one wiring (ground line) in the harness, and is arranged so as to surround at least part of the periphery of a specific signal line. be done. By forming the ground pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of noise and the like in at least part of the periphery of the specific signal line.

[No ground pattern]
As shown in FIG. 7, signal line 700 carries high-speed signals and signal line 710 carries important signals. Here, no ground pattern is arranged around each signal line. In this case, there are the following problems.
(1) A high-speed signal transmitted through the signal line 700 has a high frequency waveform of the signal (voltage) (waveform W1), and may radiate noise to the outside (noise N1, N2).
(2) A high-speed signal transmitted on the signal line 700 may affect the signal on the adjacent signal line 710 (noise N2).
(3) An important signal transmitted through signal line 710 may be affected by external noise (noise N2). In this case, the important signal transmitted through the signal line 710 may have a distorted waveform (waveform W2). A signal of interest may be a signal whose waveform rises and falls infrequently compared to fast signals. Also, important signals may be signals that are transmitted only when needed, rather than signals that are transmitted all the time, such as high-speed signals.

[With ground pattern]
As shown in FIG. 8, signal line 700 carries high-speed signals and signal line 710 carries important signals. A ground pattern 800 is arranged around the signal lines 700 and 710 . Specifically, the wiring patterns are arranged in order of the ground pattern 800, the signal line 700, the ground pattern 800, the signal line 710, and the ground pattern 800. FIG.

By arranging such a ground pattern 800, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) High-speed signals transmitted through the signal line 700 can be prevented from radiating noise to the outside (noises N3 and N4). The noise indicated by the dashed line in the figure indicates the noise suppressed or blocked by the ground pattern 800 (the same applies hereinafter).
(2) It is possible to suppress the influence of the high-speed signal transmitted through the signal line 700 on the important signal transmitted through the adjacent signal line 710 (noise N4).
(3) It is possible to suppress the influence of noise received from the outside (adjacent signal line 700) on important signals transmitted through signal line 710 (noise N4). As a result, the waveform of the important signal transmitted through the signal line 710 is not disturbed (waveform W21).

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a plurality of circuit elements (IC, circuit, etc.) including at least a control element (IC, etc.), and a wiring pattern including at least a signal line electrically connecting the circuit elements. It has a board (main control board, effect control board, driver board, etc.). The signal line includes a non-specific signal line (first signal line) through which a non-specific signal (first signal) passes, and a non-specific signal line through which a specific signal (second signal) passes. and a specific signal line (second signal line) to be used. The specific signal differs from the non-specific signal in at least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency. The wiring pattern includes a ground pattern arranged at least partially around a specific signal line.

For example, a plurality of signal lines are connected to an output-side IC (control element) (not shown), and the ground pattern 800 is arranged at least partly around a specific signal line among the plurality of signal lines. ing. Signal line 700 and signal line 710 are specific signal lines. The specific signal line is preferably a signal line for a clock signal, a command data signal, or a reset signal (a signal line for a power-off notice signal).

The clock signal is a signal that is input from the clock generation circuit to the main controller. A command data signal is a signal of an effect command input from the main control device to the effect control device. A reset signal is a signal that is input to the main controller from an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage.

The specific signal line is preferably a data bus signal line, a solenoid drive signal line, or a chip select signal line. Non-specific signal lines that are not specific signal lines (signal lines with no ground pattern arranged around them, first signal lines) are, for example, signals for gate switches, count switches, prize winning opening switches, and probability variable area switches. A line etc. can be mentioned.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which a signal line is entirely surrounded by a ground pattern. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, each member may be illustrated with a different size or dimension from the actual size (the same shall apply hereinafter).
The output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700 . Although only one signal line is shown here, a plurality of signal lines may actually exist (same below). The ground pattern 800 is arranged around the output side IC 900 , the receiving side IC 910 and the signal line 700 so as to completely surround the signal line 700 . Since the ground pattern 800 completely surrounds the signal line 700, noise generated from the signal line 700 and noise received by the signal line 700 can be greatly reduced.

The ground pattern 800 and the signal line 700 (specific signal line, second signal line) are arranged at least partially in parallel on the board (main control board, performance control board, driver board, etc.). . Width X in the short direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the ground pattern 800 is equal to width Y in the short direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the signal line 700 (specific signal line) or perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the signal line 700. It is preferably wider than the width Y in the lateral direction (X≧Y). A via hole 810 may be formed in the ground pattern 800 . When the board on which the ground pattern 800 is arranged is, for example, a double-sided board (two-layer board), the via holes 810 are arranged on the ground pattern on the front side (front side) and on the back side (back side). It is a hole for electrically connecting with the ground pattern. It is preferable to form the via hole 810 in the middle of the ground pattern 800, and it is preferable to form one via hole every predetermined length (for example, about 15 mm or less). Also, the width X of the ground pattern 800 is preferably equal to or larger than the diameter D of the via hole 810 .

At least one via hole 810 can be formed when the pattern width of the ground pattern 800 is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (0.5 mm). By arranging a plurality of via holes 810 in the middle of the ground pattern 800, it is possible to prevent the ground pattern 800 from becoming an antenna (radio wave transmission source, reception source, etc.) and affecting other signal lines or being affected by other signal lines. can be suppressed (antenna prevention).

When forming a via hole (through hole, machined hole), it is preferable to secure a dimension from the via hole to the end face of the substrate that is equal to or greater than the plate thickness. The pattern width and pattern spacing to be arranged on the control board (printed wiring board) on which the output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are arranged should be at least 0.2 mm, preferably , 0.3 mm or more. The layer structure of the four-layer board can be arranged in the following order: (1) component surface, (2) GND layer, (3) power supply layer (GND), and (4) solder surface. In the power supply layer (GND) of (3) above, a necessary power supply pattern width can be secured, and the rest can be a solid GND.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a portion of the signal line is surrounded by a ground pattern.
The output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700 . Also, the output side IC 901 and the reception side IC 911 are connected by a signal line 710 . Ground pattern 800 is arranged between signal line 700 and signal line 710 extending in parallel. In this way, the ground pattern 800 is arranged so as to surround at least part of the periphery of the signal line 700 and the signal line 710 rather than the entire periphery thereof. Also, via holes 810 are arranged at both ends of the ground pattern 800 .

By arranging the ground pattern 800 in this manner, it is possible to suppress mutual influence between the high-speed signal transmitted through the signal line 700 and the important signal transmitted through the signal line 710 . Further, by arranging the via hole 810 at the end of the ground pattern 800, it is possible to prevent the ground pattern 800 from acting as an antenna and affecting other signal lines or being affected by other signal lines (antenna prevention).

FIG. 11 shows an example of arranging a ground pattern for each of a plurality of signal lines.
Here, three ground patterns 800 are arranged. Four signal lines 720A are arranged between the first and second ground patterns 800, and four signal lines 720B are also arranged between the second and third ground patterns 800. there is The signal lines to be put together can be, for example, memory bus lines, etc., and a ground pattern can be arranged every several lines (several bits). By arranging such a ground pattern 800, a plurality of signal lines can be combined into one, thereby suppressing the generation of noise.

12 and 13 are conceptual diagrams explaining the damping resistance.
FIG. 12 shows an example without a damping resistor, and FIG. 13 shows an example with a damping resistor.
[Without damping resistance]
As shown in FIG. 12, the output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700 . In this case, the high-speed signal transmitted by the signal line 700 may overshoot (undershoot) and cause radiation noise (noise N5). The overshoot (undershoot) is a phenomenon in which the waveform exceeds the reference line at the rising (falling) portion of the rectangular wave.

A high-speed signal transmitted through the signal line 700 has a signal (voltage) waveform that fluctuates with high frequency, and a plurality of signals may be transmitted at the same timing through a plurality of signal lines. interfere (combined), and the waveform tends to be sharply pointed (waveform W3).

[With damping resistance]
As shown in FIG. 13, the output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700 . The output-side IC 900 is an output-side element that outputs a high-speed signal (predetermined signal). Receiver IC 910 is a receiver element that receives high speed signals. The signal line 700 is a transmission line that connects the output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 and transmits high-speed signals.

A damping resistor 920 is arranged on the signal line 700 . Damping resistor 920 is a circuit element arranged (connected in series) on signal line 700 to reduce noise generated from signal line 700 . The damping resistor 920 is a resistor for attenuating the sharpness of the waveform (blurring the waveform, softening the waveform), and can reduce signal noise and suppress overshoot and undershoot.

Ground patterns 800 are arranged on both sides (upper and lower sides in the figure) of the signal line 700 from the output side IC 900 to the reception side IC 910 . The ground pattern 800 may be arranged so as to surround the output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 as well, or may be arranged only between the output side IC 900 and the damping resistor 920 .

For example, the output side IC900 corresponds to the effect control device 124 and the effect control CPU126 shown in FIGS. etc.

That is, the output side IC900 (output side element) is arranged on the effect control board of the effect control device 124 shown in FIGS. A receiving side IC 910 (receiving side element) is arranged on the driver board 138 shown in FIGS. A signal line for electrically connecting the effect control board and the driver board 138 and transmitting a predetermined signal such as a drive signal, a control signal, or a command signal to the board or harness that connects the effect control board and the driver board 138. 700 (transmission line) is arranged. A damping resistor 920 (circuit element) that reduces noise generated from the signal line 700 is arranged on the signal line 700 .

A distance L1 from the output IC 900 to the damping resistor 920 is shorter than a distance L2 from the receiver IC 910 to the damping resistor 920 . Since the effect of the damping resistor 920 is exerted in the portion downstream of the damping resistor 920 (L2 portion), the damping resistor 920 is arranged as close as possible to the output side IC 900 (or its terminal). is preferred.

By adopting such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) Overshoot (undershoot) can be suppressed by the damping resistor 920, and radiation noise can be suppressed (waveform W4).
(2) By bringing the damping resistor 920 closer to the output side IC 900, it is possible to limit (reduce) the range in which radiation noise (noise N5) is generated.
(3) Placing the ground pattern 800 on both sides of the signal line 700 can suppress radiation noise (noise N5).

[Relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery]
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

When the set value is "1", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (high probability state) is "1/100".

In this way, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (lower probability state), which is advantageous for the player.

In the example shown in the figure, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described as an example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided in the high probability state. Moreover, as for the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be provided with a setting difference. Furthermore, other items (for example, the rate of transition to a high probability state, the rate of transition to a time reduction state, the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of time reduction, the number of special variations, etc.) may be provided with a setting difference.

Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main controller 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main controller]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts CPU initialization processing. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power shutdown, or conversely clears the backup information, thereby restoring the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for arranging. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of CPU initialization processing. Each procedure of the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table to the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority required to control interrupt requests generated during CPU initialization processing, and the main control CPU 72 follows the priority defined in the interrupt vector table. Based on this, a plurality of interrupt requests are executed in order. The control of interrupt processing will be described later in detail.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the value of the input port to which the RAM clear signal is input is obtained twice consecutively, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes standby processing here. This process secures a certain amount of waiting time (for example, about several thousand milliseconds) after the power is turned on, and during that time, checks for a power-off notice signal (a signal indicating that the power is about to be cut off). It is a thing. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power-off notice signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power-off warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. When the input of the power-off notice signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to protect the system even if the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been operated (switched ON). do. If the RAM clear switch 304 has not been operated (No), then step S112 is executed.

Step S112: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup was successfully completed in the process executed at the time of the previous power shutdown and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A5H") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S114. Note that the processing executed when the power is turned off will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S114: The main control CPU72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including use-prohibited area and stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the sum check result is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S116.

Step S116: The main control CPU72 clears the contents stored in the partial area of the RAM76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a continuous work area within a predetermined range based on the address of the backup validity determination flag to be cleared when the power is restored. By clearing the stored contents of this area for each address (in bytes) and retaining valid backup information as it is, the main control CPU 72 can restore the state at the time of power shutdown. (memory restoring means).

Step S118: The main control CPU 72 provides an effect command (command to be sent to the effect control device 124) and a payout command (to be sent to the payout control device 92) indicating that the main control CPU 72 has recovered from the power shutdown and started. command).

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 304 was operated when the power was turned on (step S110: Yes), if the backup validity determination flag was not set (step S112: No), or if the backup information was not normal. If so (step S114: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S120.

Step S120: The main control CPU72 clears the storage contents of the RAM76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents thereof are erased.
Step S122: The main control CPU72 also initializes the RAM76.

Step S124: The main control CPU sets the effect command (command for the effect control device 124) and the payout command (command for the payout control device 92) indicating that the RAM clear has been started.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command set in step S118 (power recovery designation) or the payout command set in step S124 (RAM clear designation) to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power return designation) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear designation) set in step S124 to the effect command buffer. The main control CPU 72 further includes various other production commands necessary for production control (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state designation command, special figure destination judgment production command, working memory number increase production command, working memory number decrease A time effect command, a number-of-counters remaining command, a special game state designation command, a firing position designation command, etc.) are set, and these are output to the effect command buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 sets different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these production commands to the production control device 124 in the subsequent production command transmission process (step S142), the production control device 124 changes the production state (for example, internal The probability state, the display mode of the effect pattern, the effect display mode of the working memory number, the contents of the sound output, the light emission state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 obtains the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the status flag of each input port. After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S131 (connection symbol A→A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. The main command permission signal is a signal that indicates to the payout control device 92 that the main control device 70 permits command transmission to itself. When the main command permission signal is input to the payout control device 92, the payout control device 92 receives this and inputs the payout command permission signal to the main control device 70 to authorize the transmission of the payout command. becomes.

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (turns OFF) the specific bit of the output port and clears the firing enable signal (specific output information clearing means). The launch enable signal is included in the target of backup when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the main control CPU 72 executes the flow at the time of power restoration in the CPU initialization process, and restores the main control device 70 to the power-off state based on the backup information. (step S116), and as part of this process, the firing permission signal is also returned to the state at the time of power shutdown.

The fire enable signal is set to a specific bit (eg bit 0) in a specific output port buffer (eg the buffer for output port 3) stored in RAM 76 . However, the address of the target output port buffer is located outside the continuous area cleared in step S116 in the address space of the RAM 76. FIG. For this reason, if, as part of the processing of step S116, it is attempted to clear the value of the specific bit at the specific address where the firing enable signal is set in addition to the area to be cleared, then after specifying the specific address, , out of the 8-bit data stored at that address, only a specific bit of data is cleared while the remaining 7-bit data is maintained. The process of clearing the area becomes very inefficient. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 does not clear the firing permission signal in the previous step S116, treats it in the same way as other data to be backed up, and returns it to the state at the time of power shutdown.

However, at the stage when the backup information is returned in the main controller 70 (step S116), communication with the payout control device 92 has not yet been established, and whether the payout control device 92 has started normally (main control device It is not possible to confirm whether or not the instruction by the command from 70 can be accepted. If the power is cut off while the firing permission signal is ON, the firing permission signal is returned to ON, so that the game ball can be fired even though the normality of the payout control device 92 is unknown. state will occur. Here, temporarily, while the power is cut off, the payout control device 92 is replaced with a modified product that does not conform to the original inspection (for example, the number of prize balls is modified, etc.), and the main control device 70 is restored by the subsequent power restoration. When activated, the game ball can be shot by returning the shooting permission signal to ON. Such a state is not preferable from the viewpoint of security.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the start-up is due to power restoration or the start-up specified to clear the RAM, the main control CPU 72 explicitly clears the firing permission signal once before transitioning to the main loop ( reset to OFF). After that, when the main control CPU 72 confirms that a payout command permission signal has been input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and then transmits a payout command to the payout control device 92, It adopts control to set the launch permission signal to ON. By performing such control, even if the game is started (restarted) by the processing of the main loop, unless the communication between the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 is established, the shooting of game balls is not permitted. , it is possible to avoid the illegal shooting of the game ball when the illegality as described above is committed.

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt period. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the timer interrupt period (eg, 4 ms) to the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194 .
Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop, which will be described later, as preparation for interrupt processing. By performing this processing, it becomes possible to start the interrupt processing that occurs thereafter normally, and to continue the processing from the main loop after the execution of the interrupt processing.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 described below). As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop from beginning to end.

Steps S136, S138: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts and then executes initial value update random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot design random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) except for the jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and the hit determination random numbers corresponding to normal symbols (hardware random numbers) is generated programmatically. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S212 in FIG. 19). ) is changed. The initial value update random number is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S138, the initial value update random number is updated. The reason why step S138 is executed after prohibiting the interrupt in step S136 is that the same processing is executed in another timer interrupt processing (step S210 in FIG. 19). ) is to prevent In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (eg, several microseconds) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several milliseconds). Therefore, there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot determined random numbers and the winning determined random numbers. Note that timer interrupt processing will be described later using another drawing.

Step S140: The main control CPU 72 executes received command management processing. In this process, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process according to the result is performed. If the received command is a payout start designation command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation designation command to the payout command buffer. If it is out of range, output the payout error designation command to the production command buffer, and set the payout radio wave error flag according to the situation.

Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes effect command transmission processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 transmits each effect command output to the effect command buffer to the effect control device 124 .

Steps S144, S146: The main control CPU 72 permits interrupts and executes random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning types (hit types) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes. The contents of the interrupt process will be described later using another flowchart.

[Save processing at power failure]
Next, a description will be given of processing to be executed when power is cut off (hereinafter abbreviated as “power cut”). FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of save processing at power failure. In main controller 70, occurrence of power failure and occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted in a reset controller (not shown)). This monitor IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162 and outputs a power-off warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I/O port 79 when the voltage level drops below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes power-off saving processing (XINT interrupt processing, backup means) with the input of the power-off warning signal to the XINT terminal (XINT interrupt) as a trigger. Each procedure of the saving process at the time of power failure will be described below.

Steps S150, S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power failure detection switch input port of the parallel I/O port 79 and checks a specific bit to confirm whether or not the power failure warning signal has been detected. If it is not possible to confirm that the power-off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 permits an interrupt, terminates the saving process at power-off, and the main loop ( program address indicated by the stack pointer). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power-off warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S154.

Step S154: The main control CPU 72 has output ports corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97, and the variable probability area solenoid 99, as well as test signal terminals and command control. Clear the output port buffer associated with the signal.

Steps S156 and S158: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, in 1-byte units, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S160: When sum calculation is completed for all areas (step S158: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S162: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup validity determination flag area.
Step S164: In addition, the main control CPU 72 stores "00H" representing access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and stack area) of the RAM 76.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined value for counting the number of checks of the power-off warning signal in the loop counter.
Step S168: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a power-off notice signal has been detected. The confirmation method of the power-off warning signal is the same as the method in step S150 described above. When it is confirmed that the power-off warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the previous step S166 again. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the power-off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S170.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter.
Step S172: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the loop counter is "0". If it cannot be confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S168. On the other hand, when confirming that the value of the loop counter is "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S174.
Step S174: The main control CPU 72 shifts from the power-off saving process to the CPU initialization process (FIG. 15). At this time, since the RETI instruction is not executed before shifting to the CPU initialization process, the CPU initialization process can be started while other interrupts are still disabled.

The processing of steps S166 to S172 described above is, so to speak, standby processing (progress observation processing) that is executed in preparation for interruption of power supply from the power control unit 162 . When the power-off warning signal is continuously detected, steps S166 to S168 are repeatedly executed, so the loop counter never becomes "0". Therefore, the standby state continues as long as the power supply continues. On the other hand, if the detection of the power-off warning signal is temporary (for example, detection due to a momentary power failure), steps S168 to S172 are repeatedly executed, and the loop counter is decremented as time elapses. Triggered by the change to "0", the process shifts to the CPU initialization process. In other words, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, enters a standby state, and performs other processing under the situation where the power supply is being cut off. While the standby state is maintained without execution and the coming cutoff of the power supply is approached in a safe state, the CPU is initialized under the condition that the stable power supply is restored after a temporary power cutoff. Move to processing and restart the main processing. By executing such a standby process, it is possible to ensure stable game operations of the main controller 70 and thus the pachinko machine 1 .

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is interrupted, the power supply source for the main controller 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Main controller 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) after a power failure (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on main controller 70). It is retained without being lost even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be added to the sum) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. In addition, the retained memory is restored as backup information at the time of power failure after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous CPU initialization processing (FIG. 15).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, processing executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command reception interrupt processing. The payout control device 92 transmits to the main control device 70 a payout start designation command indicating that the payout of game balls has started, and also various devices related to the payout of prize balls (for example, It relays and transmits commands transmitted to the main controller 70 from the payout device board 100, the full tank switch 161, etc.). These commands transmitted by the payout controller 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main controller 70 . The main control CPU 72 executes command reception interrupt processing (SCU interrupt processing) with this command reception (SCU interrupt) as a trigger. Each procedure of the command reception interrupt processing will be described below.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and F register (flag register) used during execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM76. A different value can be written to each register after saving the value during the process of the data reception interrupt processing.

Step S182: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). When it is confirmed that there is data in the received data register (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S184. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that there is data in the received data register (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S186.
Step S184: The main control CPU 72 stores the contents of the data register in the received command buffer.

Steps S186, S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, and after permitting the interrupt, terminates the command reception interrupt processing and starts the CPU initialization processing. Return to the main loop (Fig. 16).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example procedure of timer interrupt processing. The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (PTC interrupt processing) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on an interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output from the timer circuit 194 . Each procedure of timer interrupt processing will be described below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the AF register (a pair of accumulator and flag register) and the BC, DE, and HL registers (a pair of general-purpose registers) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. evacuate. A different value can be written to each register after saving the value during the timer interrupt process.

Step S202: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits interruption. By permitting an interrupt here, it becomes possible for another interrupt to occur while the steps after the next step of the timer interrupt processing are being executed. In this way, multiple interrupts are permitted in timer interrupt processing. The interrupt controller 192 executes the acceptance of interrupt request signals, priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like. Interrupt management by the interrupt controller 192 will be described later.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes dynamic port output processing. In this processing, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. More specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 stores the content output to the common output request buffer corresponding to the selected common in the output port.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes port input processing. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 outputs the logical product of the input value of various switch signals from the parallel I/O port 79 and the inverted result value of the previous input value. is stored in the input port ON detection flag. As a result, the value (ON/OFF) of the input port ON detection flag makes it possible to accurately grasp the input state based on the changes from the previous time of various switch signals. Specifically, the various switch signals include a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and the variable probability area switch 95, a middle start prize opening switch 80, a right start prize opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch. Winning detection signals from 85, first winning port switch 86, second winning port switch 81, and the like are included.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes timer update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 decrements by 1 counters such as timers for external information, security signal timers, etc., in addition to the timers that manage the game time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory.

Step S210: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process here. The contents of the process are the same as those described in the CPU initialization process (step S138 in FIG. 16).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and normal symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and looped within a prescribed range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S214: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S206), the gate switch 78, the middle start prize opening switch 80, the right start prize opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 Based on the winning detection signals from the first winning slot switch 86 and the second winning slot switch 81, events occurring during the game are determined, and further processing is executed according to the respective events. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In this embodiment, when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol respectively It is determined that an event that serves as a trigger (lottery trigger) has occurred. Also, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When determining that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each occurrence event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes setting change processing (setting related processing). In this processing, processing associated with changing and confirming setting values is executed. In addition, if it is not in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, that is, if it is in the game possible state, the main control CPU 72 skips this step (without executing the setting change process), and instead calculates the base. and display on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU 72 determines the number of winning balls paid out by entering each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, big winning opening) as an out number indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch).

Also, when the setting change process (setting-related process) is executed in this step, the main control CPU 72 generates a setting-related end designation command. Here, the "setting-related end specifying command" is an effect command for notifying that the processing related to setting change or confirmation has ended. can be included. The generated setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed within the main loop.

Step S216, step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 . Among these, in the special symbol game process (step S216), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or controls the execution of the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol. It determines variable display and stop display by the 2 special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

In addition, in the normal symbol game process (step S218), the main control CPU72 determines the variable display or the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, or operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. to control. For example, the main control CPU72 stores the random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired with the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and in this normal symbol game process A random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery executing means). When the random number falls within the winning range, the normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. It is excited to operate the variable starting prize winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs stop display of normal symbols in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

Step S220: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes state management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether there is an abnormality in the frequency of winning (a state in which the number of balls entering the middle start winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally high) or a base abnormality (the number of balls collected to the back side of the game board unit 8). The number of game balls, that is, the total number of winning balls to each winning opening 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is greater than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). A check is made to see if a high state has occurred. When an abnormal state is detected, the main control CPU 72 outputs a security signal to the hall computer of the game hall, and transmits a predetermined effect control command to the effect control device 124, so that an abnormality has occurred. to notify.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port ON detection flag stored based on the winning detection signal input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S206) is ON, Each target prize ball control counter is incremented by 1 and updated.

Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. Although the detailed flow is not shown, in this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is empty (is the payout command to be sent set), and confirms whether it is not empty (the payout command is is set), the various payout commands output to the payout command buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92 . For example, a payout command indicating the startup mode at power-on is set during the CPU initialization process (steps S118 and S124 in FIG. 15) and output to the payout command buffer (step S126 in FIG. 15). However, a payout command indicating this activation mode is sent here. On the other hand, when the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to instruct the payout of prize balls. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is not 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball-specified payout command that indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to More specifically, a prize ball-designated payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter updated in the previous step S222 is transmitted here. The payout command is transmitted when the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main controller 70 and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFO) is a predetermined number. less than (more specifically, if the payout command set in the transmission FIFO in step S224 executed before the previous time has been transmitted, or is currently being transmitted and there is space in the transmission FIFO ) only.

In addition, especially in step S224 when the power is turned on, when the payout command set in the course of the CPU initialization process is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the firing permission signal with this as a trigger. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the firing permission signal by setting the specific bit of the output port (specific output information setting means). As a result, the shooting of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and this shooting permission signal is sent to the shooting control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be shot. state.

Also, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize content command. Also, when a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (10 game balls) is generated. The prize contents command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the port output process (step S236) to be described later.

[Regarding the number of prize balls and the number of winning game balls]
The number of prize balls for the start opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls for the start opening of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of special symbols and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may Furthermore, the probability of winning a special pattern, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the opening time of the large winning opening, the maximum winning number of the large winning opening, and the number of winning balls in the large winning opening are specified. When the conditions are satisfied, a big win may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one big win is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S226: The main control CPU 72 executes firing position designation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the firing position designation flag to the previous firing position designation flag and then clears the firing position designation flag. On top of that, the main control CPU 72 turns on the firing position specification flag if the variable winning device is in operation or the time reduction function is in operation, and if the firing position specification flag and the previous firing position specification flag match If not, generate a firing position specification command. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed within the main loop.

Step S227: The main control CPU 72 executes security management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not an illegal winning has occurred or whether an excessive winning has occurred based on the input state (ON/OFF) of various winning detection signals. make a judgment. In addition, the main control CPU 72 monitors fraud based on input signals from magnetic detection sensors, vibration detection sensors, radio wave detection sensors, and the like (not shown). Then, when determining that such an error has occurred, the main control CPU 72 generates an error command. It should be noted that the main control CPU 72 can execute a handling process corresponding to the error. The countermeasure processing includes, for example, processing to rewrite the bit of the winning detection signal due to fraudulent winning from ON to OFF, processing to generate a warning sound, processing to stop the game, and the like. When detecting an error, the main control CPU 72 transmits an error command corresponding to various errors to the production control device. The error may include not only an error such as illegality but also the state of the gaming machine (state such as setting change).

Step S228: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs external information signals (e.g. winning ball information, door opening information, number of pattern confirmation information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in the request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5" are output as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing the jackpot information into a plurality of "jackpots 1" to "jackpots 5" and outputting them, the types of jackpots (types of winnings) can be tallied and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations. Occurrence of small hits that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the shortened state of symbol fluctuation time (hit that does not operate the conditional device) even if it is not winning. can be aggregated and managed. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently jackpotting. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current symbol variation time is shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the respective output states (set of ON or OFF) of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5".

Step S230: The main control CPU 72 also executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation, during jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). Generate test signals and store them in port output request buffers. With this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70, for example.

Step S232: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. Processing necessary for managing lighting states of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is performed. Concretely, in the aspect which corresponds to the fluctuation display and stop display of the design which is decided in previous special design game processing (step S216) and normal design game processing (step S218), working memory number display, game state display and the like A drive signal for lighting each lamp is stored as byte data in the port output request buffer for each common.

The byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is sequentially stored in the output port by one common in the dynamic port output processing (step S204) each time the timer interrupt processing occurs. output. For example, in the next timer interrupt processing, the byte data stored for common 1 is output from the port, and in the next timer interrupt processing, the byte data stored for common 2 is output from the port. , and so on, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is processed one by one. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (variation display of symbols, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.) is sequentially driven in units of commons, and lighting is controlled by a dynamic lighting method. will be

Step S234: The main control CPU 72 also executes solenoid output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates drive signals for the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 and the probability variable area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. , test signals, etc. are stored in the port output request buffer.

Step S236: The main control CPU 72 executes port output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output request buffer), and if a value is stored, outputs to the port. For example, the drive signals for the solenoids 88, 90, 97 and 99 stored in the port output request buffer in the previous step S234 are port-output. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to each corresponding solenoid 88, 90, 97, 99, and each solenoid can be operated according to the drive signal.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing of steps S216 to S236 (game control program module) is executed as part of the timer interrupt processing. There are known programming examples that do.

Step S238: The control CPU 72 restores the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, terminates the timer interrupt processing, and proceeds to the main loop of the CPU initialization processing (FIG. 16). return.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
As described above, in the main controller 70, during the execution of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 15), which is the main control program, the XINT interrupt (parallel interrupt that is the source of the power-off saving process (FIG. 17)) is executed. interrupt request output by the I/O port 79), SCU interrupt (interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 which is the source of command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 18)), PTC interrupt (timer interrupt An interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194 that is the source of the interrupt processing (FIG. 19) can occur. These interrupt requests are managed/controlled by an interrupt controller 192 implemented in main controller 70 . The interrupt controller 192 permits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72, and prohibits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction), a so-called maskable interrupt. control.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent causes without interdependence, it is naturally conceivable that multiple interrupt requests may be generated at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to the priority of the interrupt requests determined in advance in consideration of the importance of interrupt processing, processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of interrupt requests (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table. receive interrupt processing) has the highest priority. By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process (step S102 in FIG. 15), the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at the timing after this. . In practice, after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 in FIG. 16), interrupts are permitted (step S144 in FIG. 16) and interrupts are prohibited (step S144 in FIG. 16). 16), the interrupt controller 192 controls the received interrupt request based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when an XINT interrupt and a PTC interrupt are accepted at the same time, the PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing) with higher priority is processed first. While the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in an interrupt waiting state, and after the timer interrupt processing is completed, the power-off save processing is executed.

In addition, if you check the procedure example of each interrupt processing again, in the save processing at power failure (Fig. 17) and the command reception interrupt processing (Fig. 18), immediately before returning from each interrupt processing (RETI instruction is executed (step S152 in FIG. 17, step S188 in FIG. 18). loading is allowed (step S202 in FIG. 19), after which the main steps are performed. That is, the interrupt controller 192 (main control CPU 72) prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during execution of save processing at power failure and command reception interrupt processing. allow the execution of

By controlling interrupt requests based on priority in this manner, the interrupt controller 192 enables multiple interrupts to be executed in the main controller 70 .

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S214 in FIG. 19). Each procedure will be described below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here, similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S<b>18 : The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning port of the first variable winning device 30 . When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big winning game. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning port of the second variable winning device 31 . When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big win game. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes normal symbol memory update processing. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, acquires a random number per normal symbol. do. Also, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the obtained random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the variable probability area switch 95 corresponding to the variable probability area provided inside the second variable winning device 31 . When the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes the probability changing area passing process. As the probability variation area passage time process, the main control CPU72 executes the process of setting the value of the probability variation function operation flag (01H) as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means , advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). This probability variation function operation flag is reset when the special symbol varies a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a probability variable region passing command as the probability variable region passage time process. The variable probability region passing command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmitting process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed within the main loop. It should be noted that the main control CPU72 may execute the probability variable area passing process only within a specific valid time (for example, within the time during which the probability variable area solenoid 99 is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when there is no detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 20). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Random numbers can be stored in sets (groups) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 20). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored, for example, in the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). A random number is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75 . When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed in two batches of 1 byte each for the upper and lower bytes. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. Acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot design random number from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot design random number corresponding to the first special design at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by designating the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern determination random number from the specified address, it saves them to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section of the area. (storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, 1st to 4th) is set for a plurality of sections, and if all the 1st to 4th sections are empty at the present stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that reading from the random number storage area is in FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. If it is other than during a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the performance based on the prediction is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: If it is not during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the content of the effect is determined accordingly. It is for judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (for example, "B8H") with respect to the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination production for the first special symbol". In addition, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a one word length command will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, a one-word-length command is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command. Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the low-order byte is set to "0" by default to indicate that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the current working memory number is "01H" as a result of incrementing by one from the previous working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is ``02H'' to ``04H'', it means that the number of working memories ``01H'' to ``03H'' up to the previous time has increased by 1, resulting in the number of working memories ``02H'' to ``02H'' to `` 04H”. It should be noted that the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the starting entrance winning sound control command. It is.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 20).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory updating process (step S16 in FIG. 20). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and checks whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working memory number counter also indicates the number (number of sets) of the jackpot decision random numbers and jackpot pattern random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 20). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 21), based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19). will be

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random number is the same as in step S32 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. The method of obtaining the random number is the same as in step S33 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S44: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section in the area. stored as a set in (storage means). The method of storage is the same as that of step S35 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. Then, if it is other than during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that, likewise, an effect based on prediction is not performed for a ball entering during a big hit.

Step S46: If it is other than during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the second special symbol jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect contents are determined accordingly. It is for judging. Note that the specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S47: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (for example, "B9H"). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination performance regarding the second special symbol". Similarly here, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, one word A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length effect command is obtained by adding the increased working memory number (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. to generate Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the low-order byte to "0" by default, it is possible to express that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made to transmit to the effect control device 124 the special figure destination determination effect command, the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories, the start opening winning sound control command, etc. with respect to the second special symbol.
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 20).

[Production determination process when acquired]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU72 executes this acquisition time effect determination process in the previous first special symbol memory update process and second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 21, step S46 in FIG. 22) (preliminary determination means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the processing related to the first special symbol or the processing related to the second special symbol. The contents of the processing will be described below along each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of failure).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the big hit determination random number as the first judgment random number. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 21) or second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 22). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit value) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number from this comparison value. Incidentally, the comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes fluctuation pattern information pre-determination processing at the time of deviation (fluctuation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior judgment information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) especially at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is the time of operation of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "loss reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)". determine whether there is As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-shortened fluctuation time". In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation, it is also possible to determine "reach group (type of reach)" from the reach mode random number and generate a fluctuation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not in operation (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "normal deviation reach fluctuation" Determine whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "usual deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, as in the process at the time of loss described above.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the hit determination random number that has been stored so far, the hit pattern random number that is paired with this is "a pattern that can pass through the probability variable area (eight rounds) Any probability variable pattern other than the normal pattern. )”, the probability state schedule flag is set to, for example, “A0H”. This value represents a flag value for setting a high-probability state in advance determination (prefetch determination) of the jackpot determination random number obtained after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and if the jackpot pattern random numbers paired with it correspond to "non-variable (normal) patterns", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state at the time of preliminary determination (prefetch determination) of the jackpot determination random number obtained after the jackpot determination random number. If there is no winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In this example, the "probability state schedule flag" is used to strictly perform preliminary hit determination. Steps S58, S60, S62, S76, etc. may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the comparison value for the low probability (normal time) to the A register. The comparison value for low probability is also defined in advance according to the winning probability of the pachinko machine 1 at low probability.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "current probability state flag". This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state is high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76 . If the current probability state is high probability (during variable probability), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if it is low probability (normal medium), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H ”).

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag indicates a high probability (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability (No ), and then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparative value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The comparison value for high probability is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the pachinko machine 1 at high probability.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and then the next step S72 is performed. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the hit value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the big hit determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register. ), the main control CPU 72 executes the fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process at the time of loss (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the hit value range but is within the hit value range (No), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This processing is for judging the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot design random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 21) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 22). Then, in the same way as in step S54, the calculation using the comparison value is executed, and from the result, the jackpot type is "probable variable area difficult pattern (8 rounds normal pattern)" or "probable variable area passable pattern (8 rounds normal pattern). Probable variation pattern)” to determine which one corresponds. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents the "variable probability area difficult symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "01H". On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability variable area passable symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "A0H". As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that "flag has been set" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol first determination value is set to "01H" when it corresponds to the "probability variable area difficult pattern", and is set to "A0H" when it corresponds to the "probability variation area passable symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit time variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of the big hit. In the variation pattern first determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of the big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set according to the previous determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, if the prior hit determination is made based only on the current probability state, there is no need to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the probability state schedule flag has already been set (Yes), it then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the low-probability (normal) comparison value in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "probability state schedule flag". The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in the subsequent pre-determination based on the immediately preceding pre-determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76 . If the probability state based on the previous determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (variable probability), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the probability state based on the previous determination result is scheduled to return to low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag indicates a high probability schedule (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability schedule ( No), then step S64 is executed to set a high-probability comparison value.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has already been set and the value is for a high probability, the comparative value is rewritten for the high probability and then the next step S72 and subsequent steps is performed. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but indicates a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine a big hit in advance by taking into consideration subsequent changes in the internal state based on the previous determination result (normal probability state→high probability state, high probability state→normal probability state). .

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (Fig. 21) or the second special symbol memory update process (Fig. 22).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000), special symbol variation during processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. It is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of management processing (step S5000) and variable winning device management processing (step S6000) at the time of a small hit. Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the address of the return destination.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbols have not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and special symbol variation is in progress. If the process is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU selects which process to execute next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and at the beginning step, it refers to the flags one by one and performs conditional branching (continuation/return). There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU72 performs the work of preparing the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbols. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1-byte data) is output to each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, and thereby the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. In this case as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the big win in the previous special symbol stop display process. When the special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot mode, an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to a jackpot game state (advantageous special game state for the player). During the big hit game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. In the jackpot time variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 waits for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or until 10 game balls are counted). ), it is excited for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 open and close in a predetermined pattern. During this time, the game balls are focused on the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collectively win many prize balls (special game means of execution). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is called "round", and if the number of consecutive operations is 10 times in total, these are called "10 rounds". may be collectively referred to.

In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed from the 1st round to the 5th round and from the 7th round to the 10th round, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the 6th round. ing.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big win game (big role) for that round only.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the main control CPU72 changes the state after the jackpot game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( high-probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high-probability state", the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is increased, for example, about 10 times higher than normal (specified game state transition means, high-probability state transition means, high-probability state setting means). In addition, in the "time shortening state", the time shortening function is activated, the probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbols is high, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of opening times increases (so-called electric chewing support is performed). Regarding the "high-probability state" and the "shortened time state", the control may shift to either one of them, or may shift to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the small hit in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to a small winning game state. During the small-hit game, the jump destination is set to the small-hit time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small winning game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes only a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 second), winning to the first big winning port hardly occurs. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) “6 rounds variable jackpot 1”
(2) "6 rounds variable jackpot 2"
(3) "8 rounds variable jackpot 1 (actually 4 rounds)"
(4) "8 rounds variable jackpot 2 (actually 8 rounds)"
(5) "8 round normal jackpot (substantially 7 rounds)"
(6) "10 rounds definite variable jackpot"
In addition, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 6 rounds, 8 rounds, and 10 rounds may be provided.

The winning kind corresponds to the kind of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stop-displayed at the time of winning. For example, "6 round probability variable big hit 1" corresponds to "6 round probability variable pattern 1" big hit, and "6 round probability variable big hit 2" corresponds to "6 round probability variable pattern 2" big hit. Further, "8 round probability variable big win 1" corresponds to the big hit "8 round probability variable pattern 1", and "8 round probability variable big win 2" corresponds to the big win "8 round probability variable pattern 2". Further, the "8 round normal jackpot" corresponds to the "8 round normal pattern" jackpot, and the "10 round probability variable jackpot" corresponds to the "10 round probability variable pattern" jackpot. For this reason, hereinafter, the "winning type" is appropriately referred to as "winning design".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the big winning opening and the probability variable area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[6 round probability variation pattern 1]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variable symbol 1", an opportunity is generated to shift from the normal state to the jackpot game state (special game executing means). In this case, from the 1st round to the 5th round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Also, in the sixth round, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation pattern 1" substantially gives the player the balls (prize balls) for 6 rounds.

Here, in the 6th round when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 1", since the second big winning opening is long open, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the probability variation area. Therefore, when it corresponds to "6 round probability variable pattern 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variable area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the big hit game The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, if it corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game so far, the end of the big hit game By activating the "time shortening function" later, the player is given the privilege of transitioning to the "time shortening state".

[6 round probability variation pattern 2]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variable symbol 2", an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, from the 1st round to the 5th round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Also, in the sixth round, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, the jackpot game of "6 round probability variable pattern 2" substantially provides the player with balls (prize balls) for 6 rounds.

Here, in the 6th round when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 2", since the second big winning opening is long open, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the probability variation area. Therefore, when it corresponds to "6 round probability variable pattern 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variable area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the big hit game The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, if it corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game so far, the end of the big hit game By activating the "time shortening function" later, the player is given the privilege of transitioning to the "time shortening state". In addition, the difference between "6 round probability variation pattern 1" and "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is the difference in the number of times of time reduction given.

[8 round probability variation pattern 1]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round probability variable symbol 1", an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the jackpot game state is generated (special game executing means). In this case, in the first round and the second round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 second). Therefore, in the 1st and 2nd rounds when the "8 round probability variable pattern 1" is met, the game ends without giving the player a substantial ball (prize ball). Also, from the third round to the fifth round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Also, in the sixth round, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Furthermore, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 second). Therefore, in the 7th and 8th rounds when the "8th round probability variable pattern 1" is met, the game ends without giving the player a substantial ball (prize ball). Therefore, the jackpot game of "8 round probability variation pattern 1" substantially provides the player with balls (prize balls) for 4 rounds.

Here, in the 6th round when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 1", since the second big winning opening is long open, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the probability variation area. Therefore, when it corresponds to "8 round probability variable pattern 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variable area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the big hit game The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, if it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game so far, the end of the big hit game By activating the "time shortening function" later, the player is given the privilege of transitioning to the "time shortening state".

[8 round probability variation pattern 2]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round probability variable symbol 2", an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, from the 1st round to the 5th round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Also, in the sixth round, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Furthermore, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long opened (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, the jackpot game of "8 round probability variable pattern 2" substantially provides the player with balls (prize balls) for 8 rounds.

Here, in the 6th round when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 2", since the second big winning opening is long open, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, when it corresponds to "8 round probability variable pattern 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variable area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the big hit game The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is provided with the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, if it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game until then, the end of the big hit game By activating the "time shortening function" later, the player is given the privilege of transitioning to the "time shortening state".

[Normal design for 8 rounds]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round normal symbols", an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to the jackpot game state (special game executing means). In this case, from the 1st round to the 5th round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Also, in the sixth round, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 second). Therefore, the 6th round in the case of the "8th round normal pattern" ends without giving the player a substantial ball (prize ball). Furthermore, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long opened (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, the jackpot game of "8 rounds normal symbols" substantially gives the player 7 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the probability variable region in the sixth round when the "8 round normal pattern" is applied, because the second big winning hole is opened short. For this reason, the "probability variation function" is not activated after the jackpot game ends, and the player is not given the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Also, if it corresponds to the "8 round normal pattern", even if the "time reduction function" was inactive in the game until then, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the jackpot game , the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is given to the player.

[10 round probability variation pattern]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variable symbol", an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to the jackpot game state (special game executing means). In this case, from the 1st round to the 5th round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Also, in the sixth round, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Furthermore, from the 7th round to the 10th round, the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, open for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, the jackpot game of "10 round probability variable pattern" substantially provides the player with 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the 6th round when it corresponds to "10 round probability variation pattern", since the second big winning opening is long open, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the probability variation area. Therefore, when it corresponds to "10 round probability variable pattern", when the game ball passes through the probability variable area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the big hit game " The "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, if it corresponds to the "10 round probability variation pattern", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is inactive in the game so far, after the end of the big hit game By activating the "time shortening function", the player is given the privilege of transitioning to the "time shortening state".

Here, the first big winning port of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur within one round. be done. In addition, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 similarly, when winning a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occurs in one round, without waiting for the longest opening time to pass Closed.

In any case, if the winning pattern corresponds to "any probability variable pattern other than the 8 round normal pattern" and the game ball passes through the probability variable area during the big win game, the internal state will be changed to "high probability" after the big win game ends. A player is provided with a privilege for transitioning to the "time reduction state". On the other hand, if the winning pattern corresponds to the "8 round normal pattern", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the variable probability area during the jackpot game, so the internal state shifts to the "low probability time reduction state" after the jackpot game ends. do. In addition, even if the winning pattern corresponds to "any probability variable pattern other than the 8 round normal pattern", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area during the jackpot game, the internal state will be "low probability time" after the jackpot game ends. Move to shortened state.

Further, in the operation patterns shown in this table, the inter-round interval time is commonly "1.5 seconds". The inter-round interval time is a waiting time set between rounds.

[small hit]
In addition, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When a small win is won, a small win game is performed separately from the big win game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game executing means). That is, in the previous special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in a low probability state or a high probability state) game) is executed. In such a small winning game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes only a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), winning to the first big winning opening hardly occurs. In addition, even if the small winning game ends, the "probability variation function" does not operate, and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" No migrating benefits are granted (and are not a prerequisite for doing so). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small win game is over, and even if you win a small win in the "shortened time state", The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit number of times is reached). In addition, in the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small win is set, but it is also possible to adopt a game specification that does not set a small win.

[Special symbol change preprocessing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76 . When the working memory numbers of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, as described above, it returns to the end address (same hereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit decision random numbers, big hit pattern random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 and those corresponding to the second special design. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then shifts (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is saved, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may be a program in which the random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored without providing such a priority order for each special symbol. Also, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whichever shifted the random number) stored in the RAM76, and subtracts The latter value is set as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decrease by 1) in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19). After completing the procedure up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes big hit determination processing (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (symbol lottery executing means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). be. Also, the range of the jackpot value differs depending on the current set value, and the range of the jackpot value is set wider in the case of the high setting than in the case of the low setting. In this way, the special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the current set value. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

If the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (symbol lottery execution means ). The "minor win" referred to here is anything other than non-winning (lose), but has a different nature from the "big win". In other words, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (game turning point) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "shortened time state", but the "minor win" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "minor win" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30, like the "big win". It should be noted that the range of the small winning value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (at the time of operation of the probability variation function). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. Thus, in this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as the hit range other than the non-winning, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and compared with the random number to determine the big hit.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the big hit flag has been set to the value (01H) in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set to the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (for example, set 0AH) by the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing when losing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when lost) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16).

In addition, in this embodiment, since 7-segment LEDs are used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of loss is always one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) with only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of deviation. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of loss for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, or corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss varies depending on whether it is in the "time reduction state" or not, the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and determines whether the current state is the "time reduction state". confirm whether or not If it is a "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of loss is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed (shortened fluctuation time determination means ). Also, even if it is not in the "time shortening state", except when performing reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time at the time of loss is based on the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, for example. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5 Seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of loss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time (at the time of loss) to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time at the time of loss to the stop symbol display timer.

In this embodiment, as a result of the internal lottery, when it corresponds to non-winning, control is performed such that, for example, a "ready-to-win effect" is generated on the effect to make it a loss, or a loss is made without generating a "ready-to-win effect". and Then, in the "loss change pattern selection table", a plurality of types of effects are defined in advance, such as "non-reach effect" and "reach effect". One of the variation patterns is selected from among them. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like.

[Example of fluctuation pattern selection table at loss]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a deviation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used when losing (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "1" to "8" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "1" to "3" correspond to variation patterns that will be lost without performing reach production, and variation pattern numbers "4" to "8" are variation patterns that will be lost after reach. Yes. Of these, the variation pattern numbers "4" to "6" correspond to the variation pattern that will be lost after normal reach, and the variation pattern number "7" corresponds to the variation pattern that will be lost after super reach, Variation pattern number "8" corresponds to a variation pattern that is lost after story reach. In addition, the variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of variation, internal state (low probability state or high probability state, non-time reduction state or time reduction state), winning pattern (hereinafter referred to as as well).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than double that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the comparison value Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "2" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 26: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is lost (other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) , the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big-hit stop symbol selection table in the big-hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol based on the big-hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of the big hit]
In this embodiment, as winning symbols selectively determined at the time of a big hit, roughly divided into six types of winning symbols are prepared. The breakdown of the 6 types is “6 round probability variable pattern 1”, “6 round probability variable pattern 2”, “8 round probability variable pattern 1”, “8 round probability variable pattern 2”, “8 round normal pattern”, “10 round probability variable pattern” ”. In addition, each winning design may further include a plurality of winning designs. For example, if it is "6 round probability variation pattern 1", it is "6 round probability variation pattern 1a", "6 round probability variation pattern 1b", "6 round probability variation pattern 1c" and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of winning symbols selected at the time of a big hit in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big win corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to this first special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means) and determines the kind of the winning symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the allocation values for each winning symbol, and each allocation value "40", "10", "50" has a denominator of 100. It corresponds to the proportion of cases. Also, in the second column from the left, "8 round probability variation pattern 1 (substantially 4 rounds)", "8 round probability variation pattern 2 (substantial 8 rounds)", "8 round normal symbol ( Substantially 7 rounds)” is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "8 round probability variation pattern 1 (substantially 4 rounds)" is 40/100 (= 40%), "8 round probability variation pattern 2 (substantially 8 rounds)” is selected 10/100 (=10%), and the percentage of “8 rounds normal pattern (actually 7 rounds)” is selected is 50/100 (=50%) . The magnitude of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. to selectively determine winning patterns. In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. The stop symbol command is described, for example, as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B1H" indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol was a big hit. represents. The EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" in the lower bytes respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, and "8 round probability variable symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". will be

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol jackpot, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process, for example. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probable number of times]
In the second column from the right of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of probability variations (ST count) given after the jackpot game ends is shown.
In this embodiment, it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 1" or "8 round probability variation pattern 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when it corresponds to the "8 round normal pattern", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variable area during the big hit game, the probability variable number of times is not given. Although it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 1" or "8 round probability variation pattern 2", when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number of times]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of times of time saving (limit number of times) given after the big win game is finished is shown.
In this embodiment, it corresponds to "8 round probability variable pattern 1" or "8 round probability variable pattern 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variable area during the big hit game, the number of times of time saving is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when it corresponds to "8 round normal pattern", the number of times of time saving is given 100 times.
In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area during the big hit game although it corresponds to "8 round probability variable pattern 1" or "8 round probability variable pattern 2", the number of times of time saving is given 100 times.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the second special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72, when the result of this big win corresponds to the second special symbol, determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column also shows distribution values for each winning symbol. Equivalent to the ratio when Similarly, in the second column from the left, "10 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern 1", and "6 round probability variation pattern 2" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation pattern" is 60/100 (= 60%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation pattern 1" is 20/100 (=20%), and the rate at which "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is selected is 20/100 (=20%).

When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. to decide Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. Here too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" is selected when the current winning symbol hits the second special symbol. It represents that. The EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" in the lower bytes respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and "10 round probability variable symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as "B2H01H". .

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process, for example. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probable number of times]
In the second column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of probability variations (ST number) given after the end of the big win game is shown.
In this embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variable pattern", "6 round probability variable pattern 1" or "6 round probability variable pattern 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variable area during the big hit game, the probability variable number of times is 170 times Granted. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given. .

[Time saving number of times]
The right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of times of shortening time (limit number of times) given after the end of the big win game.
In this embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variable pattern" or "6 round probability variable pattern 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variable area during the big hit game, the number of times of time saving is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 2" and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of times of time saving is given 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time saving times is 100 times Granted.

[See Figure 26: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time than when losing is determined.

In this embodiment, when a big hit is achieved as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "ready-to-win effect" is generated in the effect to make the game a big win. In the ``variation pattern selection table at the time of big hit'', variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of kinds of ``ready-to-win performances'' are defined, and when a big win occurs, one of the variation patterns is selected. It will be.
Here, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as a normal reach effect, a long reach effect, and a super reach effect. Also, when winning with the time reduction function in operation, even if you select a variation pattern with a short variation time (variation pattern that does not perform reach production) instead of selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time good.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used at the time of a big hit (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to variation patterns in which a ready-to-win effect is performed and hits. Of these, the variation pattern numbers "61" to "64" correspond to the variation patterns that will be hit after the story reach, and the variation pattern numbers "65" and "66" are the variation patterns that will be hit after the super reach. Correspondingly, the variation pattern numbers "67" and "68" correspond to the variation patterns that are successful after the normal reach. In addition, at the time of winning in the high-probability time-shortening state, a winning variation pattern may be set without executing the ready-to-win effect.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "62" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 26: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of the big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H ) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function activation means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means).

Also, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Next, processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win (stop symbol number at the time of the small win) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of the small win (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random number is used to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72 to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Election design at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning pattern at the time of a small win, ie, "one time open small winning pattern". However, in addition to this, for example, other types such as "twice open small winning symbol" and "three times open small winning symbol" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2 It is possible to provide a “one-time open small winning pattern” without being bound by the regulation of “more than once open)”.

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, it is possible to select a reach variation pattern in the case of a small hit, or to select a variation pattern equivalent to that in normal variation.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop design (small hit design) by the first special design display device 34 or the second special design display device 35 based on the small hit stop design number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (when lost/when hit). In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol fluctuation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 . Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol fluctuation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 24: Processing during special symbol fluctuation, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then changes the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (clock pulse count or interrupt counter value). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) to the next jump destination and generates a confirmation command. Here, the "determined command" is a command indicating that the special symbols have stopped. The confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed within the main loop.

Also, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407 and S2410 in FIG. 26). The main control CPU 72 also generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol fluctuation flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol storage area shift processing. In the previous special symbol variation pre-processing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 26: Yes), the main control CPU72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest one in the current working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the memory area of the RAM 76 is accessed, and the oldest working memory among them corresponds to the second special symbol instead of the first special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 next The process advances to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol to shift the storage area. This designation is performed by setting, for example, "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, if the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to shift the storage area. . The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. It should be noted that the specific contents of the processing are as already described in the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the object to shift the memory area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the "variation start working memory number" from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction. In addition, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, after adding the value of the working memory counter, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation" may be set.

Step S2222: In addition, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special symbol for which the storage area of this time is to be shifted is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: If the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the effect command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of one word length, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-described "effect command when the number of working memories increases". That is, the working memory number decrease effect command is a value of the lower byte (eg, "00H" to "03H") representing the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. ”) is added, and an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is added (logical OR) to the value of the lower byte. Therefore, for the lower byte, the addition value "10H" is logically summed, and the second digit becomes "1". become a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time "4" (the command notation is "14H") has decreased by one, resulting in the current number of working memories being "3" (command The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of the previous working memory number "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") decreasing by one. , indicates that the current number of working memories is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: In addition, when the object of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output processing. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the effect command set at the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (storage number notifying means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 26).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process during special symbol stop display. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 24) and repeats the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has expired (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol-fluctuation flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbols has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. If the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When elected]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process at the time of big hit". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated, and the time reduction function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big role) is started, the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variable symbol", a value corresponding to "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "8 round probability variable symbol 1, 2" or "8 round normal symbol", a value representing "8 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Furthermore, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variable symbol 1, 2", a value representing "6 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 26). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variable symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "10 rounds". In addition, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2" or "8 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "8 rounds". Furthermore, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variable symbol 1, 2", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "6 rounds". The generated continuous actuation count command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the time of the big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot flag value (01H) is not set in step S4300 (No), then step S4600 is executed.

Step S4600: The main control CPU72 then checks whether or not the small hit flag value (01H) is set. Then, the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set, and if it is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU72 sets "small hit start (during small hit)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cutting counter. In the "high-probability state" and the "short-time state", the respective counter values are set in the probability variable count area and the time-saving count area of the RAM 76, respectively. In the present embodiment, a so-called variable number-of-cuts probability function is adopted, so when shifting to the "high-probability time reduction state", the number-of-cuts counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times), A number cutting counter for the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times or 100 times). Also, when shifting to the "low-probability time reduction state", the number-of-times cutting counter for the high-probability state is not set, and the number-of-times cutting counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (eg, 100 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the number of cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating a number cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the number-of-times counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the value of the number cutting counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the multiple cut function is activated. In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "any probability variation pattern other than 6 round probability variation pattern 2" and is shifted to "high probability time reduction state", the number cutting counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is a predetermined value (eg, 170 times), it is the probability variation function activation flag and the time reduction function activation flag that are reset.

In addition, when corresponding to 6 round probability variation pattern 2 and moving to "high probability time reduction state", the number cutting counter related to the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (eg 170 times), and the number cutting counter related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (eg, 100 times). Therefore, when the 100th variation ends, the time reduction function operation flag is reset, and when the 170th variation ends, the probability variation function operation flag is reset (advantageous game state transition means , special state transition means).

Furthermore, when transitioning to the "low-probability time reduction state", the time reduction counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so only the time reduction function activation flag is reset. be. As a result, the time shortening state or the high probability state ends after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the above procedures are finished, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19) executed in the timer interrupt process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are performed by the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34 as already described. Special symbol display device 35, normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Generate and output a drive signal to be applied to each LED It is a process to

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the gaming state display device . First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the probability change state display lamp 38d and the time reduction state display lamp 38e according to the value of the probability change function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the probability variation function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. It should be noted that the probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to light until a jackpot game relating to special symbols is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbols is performed a specified number of times. Displayed (turned off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 turns on the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether the power is turned on. to output Furthermore, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big win game or a small win game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . In addition, if the value (01H) is set to the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f in addition to the time reduction state display lamp 38e. . It should be noted that the firing position designation lamp 38f, when transitioning to the "time reduction state" through the jackpot game, lights up from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the "time reduction state", and turns off when the "time reduction state" ends ( OFF).

In addition, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any one of the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the number of continuous operation status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "10 rounds (10R)". Also, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "8 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "8 rounds (8R)". Furthermore, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "6 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "6 rounds (6R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit includes the game process selection process at the time of the big win (step S5100), the process of opening the pattern for opening the big winning prize at the time of the big win (step S5200), the process of opening and closing the big winning opening at the time of the big win (step S5300), and the big win at the time of the big win. This configuration includes a subroutine group of winning opening closing processing (step S5400) and jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot time variable winning device management process to the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the next jump as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of the big hit has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big winning (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens and closes the big winning opening at the time of the big hit. If the operation process is completed, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) at the time of big hit is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process and the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit are repeatedly executed for the set number of consecutive operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU72 selects the next jump destination as the ending process at the time of the big win ( Step S5500) is selected. Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of big winning. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes symbol-specific open pattern selection processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72, according to the winning pattern of this time, the opening pattern of the big winning opening (the number of times of opening each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, the number of counts in one round (maximum number of prizes), and the operating pattern of the variable probability area solenoid 99 is selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the variable probability area solenoid 99, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big win shown in FIG. In addition, the number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short time (about 0.1 second). not, but extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning pattern selected in the jackpot stop pattern determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 26). Specifically, if "10 round probability variable design" is selected as the winning design, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 10 times. Also, if "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2" or "8 round normal symbols" is selected as winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 8 times. Furthermore, if "6 round probability variable symbols 1, 2" are selected as winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 6 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, using the corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU72, based on the large winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variable area solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204, the opening timer at the time of the big hit and the probability variable area timer (counting the opening time of the probability variable area timer). The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 and the opening time of the probability variable area. In addition, if a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the opening timer and the probability variable region timer at the time of the big hit, the opening time is the time when the ball enters the big winning opening during one opening. This is sufficient time for passage through the area to occur easily (for example, the time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or longer). On the other hand, if 0.1 second is set as the value of the opening timer at the time of the big hit and the variable probability area timer, the opening time does not mean that it is impossible to enter the big winning hole or pass through the variable probability area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, shorter than 1 second, preferably shorter than the game ball shooting interval by the shooting control board set 174) that rarely occurs (is difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU72, based on the large winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variable region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204, the interval timer at the time of the big hit and the probability variable region interval timer (the probability variable region is temporarily set a timer that counts the waiting time to close. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the big hit or the temporary closing time of the variable probability area.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big win (FIG. 34).

[Big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a big win. This process is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation. can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the big winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the big winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big win shown in FIG. As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 35) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the variable probability area interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether the probability variable region interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether the probability variable region interval timer is counting down.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variable area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the probability variable area interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU72 executes probability variable area open processing. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. As a result, the variable probability area blade member 31 d is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the variable probability area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 .

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU72 executes probability variable area timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the probability variable area timer set in the big winning opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 35) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time for the big winning opening has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. to run.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the variable probability area open time has ended. Specifically, check whether the value of the probability variable region timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable region timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: Execute probability variable region closing processing. Specifically, the process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the solenoid 99 for the probability variable region is executed. As a result, the variable probability region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the variable probability region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls winning the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first or second big winning port during opening) is counted during the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the open time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round in the jackpot). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit. Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit at the present stage, so the main control CPU 72 repeats the procedure of steps S5301 to S5310. do.

If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time for the big winning opening has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. .

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU72 executes the variable probability area closing process. Specifically, the process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the solenoid 99 for the probability variable region is executed. As a result, the variable probability region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the variable probability region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts down the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variable area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 35).

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer has not become 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 34) at the time of big hit. Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes the step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big winning opening interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the open number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined by, for example, ``opening the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 a plurality of times in one round during the jackpot''. This is to correspond to the open pattern. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern is not adopted, and the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the big hit game, the counter value reaches the set number of times with one opening and closing operation (Yes), so the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322 next.

On the other hand, if a pattern is adopted in which opening and closing operations are repeated multiple times within one round, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening operation (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, since the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the big hit at the present stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. do. As a result, the opening counter is incremented in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit. Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit.

[Big winning opening closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. This big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5402: The main control CPU72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the first round is completed, and the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage toward the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set execution round number. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the incremented round number counter value (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set execution round number (1 to 15 after subtracting 1) (No) , then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 performs the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the next jump in the game process selection process at the time of the big win (step S5100 in FIG. 34). to run. After the execution of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the closing process of the big winning opening at the time of the big hit again after executing the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. do. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of rounds to be executed (6, 8 or 10). be done.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Step S5410, step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU72 resets the round number counter (=0), the next jump destination is set to end processing at the time of the big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit. As a result, next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the end process at the time of the big hit is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot ending process. This end processing at the time of the big win is for preparing the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big win. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the initial value to the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (each time this module is called) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not passed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 terminates this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 34) at the time of the big hit.

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit game state ends in the control processing of the main control CPU 72 . Also, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the big win as an internal state on the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation function activation flag value (01H) is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event processing (step S28 in FIG. 20).

Step S5508: If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of probability variation (for example, 170 times). The value of the set probability variation frequency is stored in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, for example, and becomes the frequency cutting counter value. The number of probability fluctuations set here is the upper limit number of fluctuations (internal lottery) of special symbols in the subsequent game in a high probability state. In this embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high-probability state, there are cases where winning results are not obtained in the high-probability state and the state returns to the low-probability state (so-called variable number-of-counts). In addition, if the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the time reduction function activation flag value (01H) is set. This flag is set at the time of the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 26) during the preceding special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5512: And, if the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, it depends on the value of the probability variation function operation flag about whether to set the number of times of time saving. That is, the main control CPU72 sets 170 times as the number of times of time reduction if the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set, 100 times is set as the number of time reduction (low-probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). However, even if the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 100 times as the number of time reductions when the winning pattern corresponds to the 6 round probability variation pattern 2 (advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). The set value of the number of times of time saving is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 . The time saving frequency set here becomes the upper limit frequency for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. In addition, if the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, in accordance with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the big win, a state designation command representing "normal" as the game state is generated. Also, if the probability variation function operation flag is set, a state designation command representing "high probability" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction ” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the big hit.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 24) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit.

[Variable winning device management process at the time of small hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. Small-hit time variable winning device management processing includes small-hit time game process selection processing (step S6100), small-hit time big winning prize opening pattern setting processing (step S6200), small-hit time big winning prize opening/closing operation processing (step S6300). , a subroutine group of small-hit big winning opening closing process (step S6400) and small-hit end process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit as the return destination address in the stack pointer. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. do. On the other hand, if the small-hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small-hitting large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening opening/closing operation process is completed, the small winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the small-hit large winning opening opening/closing operation process and the small-hitting large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations, the main control CPU 72 selects the next jump destination as the small-hitting end process (step S6500). Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Processing for setting the pattern of opening the big winning opening at the time of the small hit]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for setting the pattern for opening the big winning opening at the time of the small winning. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the "small hit opening pattern". In the case of this embodiment, as for the "minor hit opening pattern", for example, opening patterns of "open for 0.1 second" are set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for the "small hit", the "open pattern" is also written as "first release" and "second release".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of openings of the large winning opening to, for example, two times, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The release count set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hit opening timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, 0.1 second is set as the value of the small win opening timer. ) for a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second, preferably less than the interval between shots of game balls by the launcher unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU72 sets an interval timer at the time of a small hit. The value of the timer set here is the standby time for each opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times at the time of a small win, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a small win (FIG. 39). Then, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S6300).

[Big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process. This processing is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to check whether the interval timer is counting down.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning hole. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 . As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small winning opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 40) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. to run.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening during opening) is counted within the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the open time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) permissible per opening (one opening at the time of a small win). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the small hit at the present stage, so the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of steps S6301 to S6310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S6306 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the open timer is set to a short time for opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S6310 before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the open time has ended.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 40).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable during the small hit Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 39). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. Then, when the small-hit time variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small-hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small-hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after incrementing has reached the set open number. The number of openings is set in the previous big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 40). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the small winning game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 39), which is the next jump destination, the big winning opening opening/closing operation process. to run. Then, after executing the small winning big winning opening opening and closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the small winning big winning opening closing process again, until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of openings (twice). , the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6418.

Step S6418, step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU72 resets the opening number counter (=0), the next jump destination is set to end processing at the time of a small hit.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process at the time of the small hit is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the end processing at the time of a small hit. This end processing at the time of a small win is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small win. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S6502: The main control CPU72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the initial value to the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer with the passage of time (each time this module is called).

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time of the small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 terminates this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Steps S6506, S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), erases "small hit" from the internal state flag, and terminates the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small win, such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag, especially since the internal conditioning device is not activated.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the small hit.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 24) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed in the normal mode when "8 rounds normal symbols" or "8 rounds probability variable symbols 1, 2" is applied.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of special symbols is "low probability state", and the winning probability of normal symbols is "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is a "low-probability non-time-reduction state". progressing.

[F1] In the normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "8 round normal pattern", [F3] 8 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, [F4] you are defeated in the battle of the production during the important role. , [F5] Shift to coast mode.

[F5] Coast mode is a low-probability time reduction state. [F5] If no winning result is obtained in the coast mode and the [F6] special symbols fluctuate 100 times, the mode shifts to [F1] normal mode.

[F1] In normal mode, [F7] If you win the "8 round probability variation pattern 1, 2" jackpot, [F3] 8 round jackpot game (battle bonus) will be executed, [F8] In the battle during the big role win.

Then, [F9] when the game ball passes through the variable probability area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V wins), [F10] an effect indicating that a V win has occurred is executed, and [F11] fireworks rush. Transition.

[F11] Fireworks Rush is a high probability time reduction state. [F11] If no winning result is obtained in the [F11] Fireworks Rush, and [F12] the special symbols fluctuate 170 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

On the other hand, if [F13] corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 1, 2", but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (V does not win), [F10] V An effect indicating that no prize has been won is executed, and the game shifts to [F5] coast mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed when "10 rounds of variable probability symbols" or "6 rounds of variable probability symbols 1, 2" apply in the fireworks rush or coast mode.
[F5] When the jackpot of [G1] ``10 round probability variable pattern'' is won in the coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G2] 10 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed.

Then, [G3] when the game ball passes through the variable probability area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V wins), [G4] an effect indicating that the V win has occurred is executed, and after the jackpot game ends [ F11] Move to fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G5] corresponds to "10 round probability variable pattern", but the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (if V does not win), [G6] V winning occurs An effect indicating that the player did not play is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, the mode shifts to [F5] coast mode.

[F5] When a jackpot of [G10] ``6 round variable probability symbols 1, 2'' is won in the coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G11] 6 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

Then, [G12] when the game ball passes through the variable probability region in the sixth round of the jackpot game (when V wins), [G13] an effect indicating that the V win has occurred is executed, and after the jackpot game ends [ F11] Move to fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G14] corresponds to "6 round probability variation pattern 1, 2", but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (V does not win), [G15] V An effect indicating that no prize has been won is executed, and then [F5] the mode shifts to the coast mode. In addition, although not shown in particular, it corresponds to "6 round probability variable pattern 2", and when 100 fluctuations have passed after shifting to fireworks rush, it shifts to normal mode, but internally it becomes a high probability non-time reduction state. ing.

It should be noted that the game flow described above is an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, several examples of effect images actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. As described above, when the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (symbol display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lighting/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, they lack visual appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display performance using performance symbols is performed.

The production pattern includes, for example, left production pattern, middle production pattern, and right production pattern, and these are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each of the production patterns is designed as a picture card with characters attached thereto, for example, along with the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect pattern, the middle effect pattern, and the right effect pattern all form a pattern row in which the numbers "9" to "1" are arranged in descending order. Such a pattern row is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 46 is a series of diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols. It should be noted that here, regarding the variation of the special symbols at the time of non-winning (lost), an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbols is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed between the start of the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol). do. In addition, the stop display effect is a effect showing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of effect symbols. Here, before describing the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the variable display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described first.

[Before change display]
(A) in FIG. 46: For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (a state in which the demo effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed in a large size on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, along with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed.

[Memory display effect]
In addition, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers representing the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference signs M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. ing. The numbers of these markers M1 and M2 displayed respectively represent the working memory numbers of the first special design and the second special design (the number of displays of the first special design working memory lamps 34a and the second special design working memory lamps 35a). The displayed number increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

In order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, for example, as a heart. is displayed in the form of In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are illuminated to indicate that the working memory number of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by broken lines). indicates that the working memory number of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the performance symbols, for example, a fourth symbol (reference symbols Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effect symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the effect symbols. The fourth patterns Z1 and Z2 are simply colored marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and by changing the display color, for example, a variable display can be expressed. The fourth design Z1 corresponds to the first special design, and the fourth design Z2 corresponds to the second special design.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the failure. This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is performed correctly and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "6 rounds big win", "8 rounds big win", or "10 rounds big win" instead of "lose", the mode corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color etc.), the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 46: For example, in synchronism with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, three symbol rows scroll and fluctuate on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to start the variable display effect (symbol effect means of execution). That is, in synchronism with the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are vertically scrolled (flowed) within the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 42 so as to be variably displayed. The performance begins. Also, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-change display area X1 of the belt-like portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the change, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the change. It moves to the display area X2 during fluctuation by the pedestal image being displayed, and continues to be displayed until the fluctuation of the special pattern (effect pattern) is stopped and displayed (stored image display maintenance effect). In addition, in the figure, the variable display of the production pattern is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, individual production patterns are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the production pattern is displayed in a state that is easy to see on the display screen. It is

The background image in this case is, for example, a scene in which a female character dressed in a yukata is sitting on a bench and relaxing as if enjoying the cool evening breeze. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in presentation is, for example, the "normal mode". In this embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display effect execution means). The difference between these modes corresponds to an internal "time reduction state" or to a "high probability state". Although not particularly illustrated here, after that, for example, an image of a character, an item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen to perform the notice effect.

In addition, during the variable display of the production patterns, the fourth pattern Z1 is displayed in a variable manner on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth pattern Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Left pattern stop]
(C) in FIG. 46: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has passed, the left effect pattern stops fluctuating first. In this example, it indicates that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped on the left side of the screen. Note that illustration of the background image is omitted here (same hereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories is reduced]
Here, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, and accordingly, the number of displayed markers M1 increases. has been reduced by one. For example, assuming that the number of working memories has been four so far, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery are combined. done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the number of working memories has been consumed with respect to the first special symbol.

Then, in the example of (C) in FIG. 46, since the marker M1 that was at the top in the storage order moves to the changing display region X2, the remaining three markers are displayed in the pre-change display region X1. An effect is produced in which the three remaining markers M1 on the screen are shifted one by one in one direction (to the left in this case). As a result, the before-and-after relationship of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed on the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and one is reduced" or "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is used." is fluctuating" can be intuitively and easily understood.

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 46: Following the left performance design, the right performance design stops changing thereafter. In this example, it indicates that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. At this point, it has already been determined that the reach state will not occur, so it is almost clear visually that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. It should be noted that reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded here. The "sliding pattern" is, for example, once the production pattern representing the number "7" stops, then the pattern row slides by one pattern and the production pattern representing the number "8" stops, thereby developing into a reach. It is to do. Alternatively, after the production pattern representing the number "9" stops, the pattern row slides in the opposite direction by one pattern, and the production pattern representing the number "8" stops, thereby developing into a reach. be. In addition, for example, after a performance pattern representing a completely different number such as "5" temporarily stops, a character appears on the screen and the right performance symbol row is changed again, representing the number "8". There is also a pattern that the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 46: Synchronizing with the stop display of the first special symbol, the last medium effect symbol is stopped. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode, the effect symbols are similarly stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode. will be That is, in the example shown in the drawing, it indicates that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the effect symbol combination is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is a deviation, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to a normal "loss". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stop-displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the loss.

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has been moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to be displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "variation of the special symbols has ended".

The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each variation. Through such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning, and to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

In addition, the above example is for the non-winning time, but when the big win (winning) is made, after the ready-to-win performance is executed during the variable display performance, the performance pattern is stop-displayed in the stop display performance in the manner of the big win. At this time, the stop display mode of the production pattern is basically made to correspond to the winning pattern selected internally by the main control CPU 72 (the stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35). selected by

[Example of production at the time of a big hit]
Next, an example of an effect at the time of a big hit (winning) will be described.
FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super ready-to-win effect executed during variable display of special symbols. The super ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-reach effect that is executed along with a variable display in which a medium variable time (for example, 50 to 100 seconds) is selected.

Here, the flow of the super ready-to-win effect that is executed at the time of the big win will be explained, but the super ready-to-win effect is executed not only at the time of the big win but also at the time of losing, albeit at a relatively low rate. Also, here, in addition to the ready-to-win effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and an advance notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (before reach generation notice effect, after reach reach generation notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following ready-to-win effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display according to the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is a big hit mode (for example, 7 segment LED "self", "yo" , “口”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) are executed (ready-to-win effect executing means). In addition, in FIG. 47, each production pattern is shown in a simplified form with only numbers. Illustrations of the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-change display area X1, and the change-in-progress display area X2 are omitted (the same applies to the following drawings). The flow of production will be described below.

[Variation display effect]
(A) in FIG. 47: For example, substantially synchronizing with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are displayed vertically on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, from the top). The variable display effect is started by scrolling downward.

[Advance notice before the occurrence of reach (1st stage)]
(B) in FIG. 47: Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first-stage ready-to-win advance notice effect using the character pattern image (face card) is performed. This advance notice effect before the occurrence of ready-to-win is a notice effect in which changes in mode progress step by step from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) in accordance with a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the reach is positioned in front of the effect pattern that is displayed in a variable manner on the screen, for example, it is displayed so as to suddenly appear from the left end of the screen (other appearance modes may be fine.). In addition, the "notice before occurrence of reach" means that the possibility of reach or the possibility of big hit is announced before any of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-notice effect before occurrence of ready-to-win", it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player feel a sense of expectation that "the game may develop into a ready-to-win = the possibility of a big win increases".

[Notice production before reaching (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 47: After the first stage of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation is executed, the change in the form of the notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation progresses to the second stage. Here, as the second-stage pre-notice production before the occurrence of reach, a production using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed overlapping the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Moreover, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the pattern image previously displayed. In addition, the character represented by the pattern image utters a line (for example, "I'm going to be a reach", etc.).

The advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach (second stage) using such a second pattern image is a step further from the notice effect before occurrence of reach (first stage) performed in (B) of FIG. It is an advanced type. The aspect of the "pre-notice effect before the occurrence of reach" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here is an example in which the 2nd stage pattern image appears in the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach, but in the production mode in which the 3rd, 4th, and 5th stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed There may be. Further, for example, the size may be increased each time the third, fourth, and fifth stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. It should be noted that, even at this stage, the variable display of the production pattern is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big win with this change by allowing the change in the state of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win to proceed to more stages. (For example, progress to level 5 suggests maximum expectations, etc.).

[Stop the left direction pattern]
(D) in FIG. 47: The middle stage of the variable display effect is approaching, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
(E) in FIG. 47: Following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this time point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped on the right side of the screen, the ready-to-win state of "5"-"fluctuation"-"5" has occurred. An image that emphasizes one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice such as "Reach!" is performed.

After the ready-to-win state occurs, the ready-to-win effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the winning result has not yet been displayed at this time). In the ready-to-win effect, only the effect pattern corresponding to the tened number (here, "5") is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. In addition, at this time, the production patterns may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurrence (1st time)]
(F) in FIG. 47: Shortly after the ready-to-win state occurs, for example, a group of images representing, for example, a heart figure passes diagonally across the screen. In this case, the images of the hearts are suddenly displayed on the screen as if they are flowing, so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a visually lively advance notice effect after occurrence of the advance notice, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player feel a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 47 (G): After the occurrence of the first reach, following the notice effect, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional row on the screen, and the row is displayed. An effect is performed in which the number images are erased from the screen in the order of '2', '3', '4', and so on from the top (front). Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implicit) or reminding the player that if the number "5" remains without being erased to the end, it is a "jackpot". Also, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "loss". In the case of a miss, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in order of numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation increases. When the effect progresses with the number "4" actually erased on the screen and the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big win" increases, and the player's tension is increased. also increases rapidly.

[Notice production after reaching (2nd time)]
(H) in FIG. 47: When the reach effect is nearing its end, a character image is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were a close-up shot, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the occurrence of the reach (the content of smiling may be acceptable), the advance notice effect (second time) is performed. At this point, for example, the content of the ready-to-win effect is such that "if the number '5' remains without being erased, the possibility of a '5'-'5'-'5' big hit increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of giving the player a sense of anticipation that "it might be a big hit."

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is also a development that ``if the numbers ``2'' to ``4'' are erased and the number ``5'' remains without being erased at the end, it will be a big hit''. When the image of the character appears at such timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of giving the player a sense of anticipation that "the big win may finally be coming".

[Stop display effect]
(I) in FIG. 47: Then, the last medium effect symbol is stopped. In this example, by stop-displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen, it is possible to inform the player of the big win.

(J) in FIG. 47: Then, for example, in approximately synchronism with the stop display of the first special symbol, a stop display effect as a effect symbol is performed. The stop display effect of the production pattern is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right production patterns are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined on the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is possible not to disclose to the player which of the winning symbols has won.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special pattern to be varied this time is stop-displayed as a losing pattern, so that the performance pattern is similarly stop-displayed in a mode of losing. In this case, by displaying numbers ``4'' and ``6'' other than ``5'' in the center of the screen, an effect is performed to notify that unfortunately this variation did not result in a big hit. In addition, such an effect is executed as a "missing reach effect".

[Example of production during big role when it corresponds to "8 round normal pattern" etc.]
FIGS. 48 to 51 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the production during the big role when the "8 round normal pattern" or the "8 round probability variable pattern 1, 2" is applied.

In this embodiment, when it corresponds to the "8 rounds normal pattern", the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the production during the important role, and it corresponds to the "8 rounds variable pattern 1, 2". In this case, an effect is executed in which the friendly character wins over the enemy character. The flow of production will be explained step by step below.

[1st round]
(A) in FIG. 48: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 1" is displayed on the screen, and a battle effect during a big role is started. In the example shown in the figure, an image of an umbrella ghost as an enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, an image of a female character as an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the characters "VS" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thus, it is possible to teach the player that the battle effect is about to start.

Also, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect pattern corresponding to the winning pattern of this time (in this case, the effect pattern of "5") is displayed. In this way, by continuing to display winning patterns (so-called "remaining eyes") even during the big win game, the player can be continuously informed of the information that "5 performance patterns have been won".

[2nd round]
(B) in FIG. 48: When the second round of the jackpot game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, an effect is performed in which an umbrella ghost moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella, runs away, and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[3rd round]
(C) in FIG. 48: When the third round of the jackpot game is started, the battle effect during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and a flame (aura) appears from it.

[4th round]
(D) in FIG. 48: Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, an effect is performed in which the umbrella ghost pulls out its long tongue from its mouth and the female character counters the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that the "8 round normal pattern" was a big hit, and if the female character wins, it means that the "8 round variable pattern 1, 2" was a big hit. means.

[5th round (when the 8th round normal pattern is won)]
(E) in FIG. 49: In the case of winning in the "8th round normal pattern", a defeat effect is executed in the fifth round. Specifically, along with the characters "defeat...", the umbrella ghost is displayed in a large size, and the female character is displayed in a small size (allied character defeat effect).

[6th round (when the 8th round normal pattern is won)]
(F) in FIG. 49: In the case of winning in the “8th round normal pattern”, a re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the female character utters a line such as "I won't lose next time!". As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for the big win again. In the round game after this, the same re-challenge promotion effect as in the sixth round is executed.

In addition, in the sixth round in the case of winning with the "8 round normal pattern", the second variable winning device 31 is opened, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area. It is difficult.

[At the end of the big role]
(G) in FIG. 49: At the timing (during the end processing) at which the jackpot game of "8 rounds normal symbols" ends (during the end processing), a big win end effect is executed which teaches the internal state to be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the screen displays text information "Starting coast mode!". By executing such a big win end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of "low probability time reduction state" as a privilege after the end of the big win game.

[5th round (when winning 1, 2 random patterns in 8 rounds)]
(H) in FIG. 50: On the other hand, in the case of winning with "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, along with the characters "Victory!!", the female character is displayed in a large size, and the umbrella ghost is displayed in a small size (allied character victory effect).

[6th round (when winning 1st and 2nd rounds of 8th round)]
In FIG. 50 (I): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter a fireworks rush, which is a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for the V-attacker!". As a result, it is possible to convey the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. Also, in the 6th round when "8 round probability variation pattern 1, 2" is won, the probability variation area solenoid 99 operates to open the probability variation area for a long time, so the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. When the ball is played, the game ball passes through the variable probability region while being guided by the blade member 31d for the variable probability region.

(J) in FIG. 50: Then, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31 and passes through the probability variable area by the player continuing to hit to the right, the panda character raises the V mark to create a blessing effect. is executed. In addition, in the subsequent round game, the same blessing effect as in the sixth round is executed.

[At the end of the big role]
(K) in FIG. 50: At the timing when the jackpot game ends (during the end process), a big win end effect is executed to teach the internal state to be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big win ending effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" firework rush as a privilege after the big win game ends.

The above corresponds to "8 round probability variation patterns 1, 2", and is an example of production when the game ball safely passes through the probability variation area, but even if it corresponds to "8 round probability variation patterns 1, 2", the game If the ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the following example will be produced.

[5th round (when winning 1, 2 random patterns in 8 rounds)]
In FIG. 51 (L): In the case of winning with "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, along with the characters "Victory!!", the female character is displayed in a large size, and the umbrella ghost is displayed in a small size (allied character victory effect).

[6th round (when winning 1st and 2nd rounds of 8th round)]
In FIG. 51 (M): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter a fireworks rush, which is a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for the V-attacker!". As a result, it is possible to convey the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. In addition, in the 6th round when "8 round probability variable pattern 1, 2" is won, the probability variable area solenoid 99 operates to open the probability variable area long, so that the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. Then, the game ball is guided by the variable probability area blade member 31d and passes through the variable probability area.

However, here, for some reason (no hitting to the right, ball clogging, etc.), it is assumed that not even one game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 before the end of the 6th round. In this case, the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area.

(N) in FIG. 51: In this case, a failure effect is executed in which the panda character utters the words "sorry". It should be noted that the failure effect is continued even in subsequent round games.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 51 (O): At the timing (during the end processing) at which the jackpot game with "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2" ends (during the end processing), the big win end effect of teaching the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the screen displays text information "Starting coast mode!". By executing such a big win end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of "low probability time reduction state" as a privilege after the end of the big win game.

In addition, when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 1", since the profit obtained is less than when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation pattern 2", production other than battle production may be executed.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 52 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a fireworks rush effect. This firework rush is a mode that is shifted after a big win game when ``any probability variable pattern other than the normal pattern of eight rounds'' is won and a game ball passes through a probability variable area during the big win game. Fireworks rush is a high probability time reduction state. The flow of production will be explained step by step below.

(A) in FIG. 52: For example, the variable display of the production pattern is performed in the state of "fireworks rush" by performing the first variable display after the end of the jackpot game. The background image of Fireworks Rush is a background image that expresses "a scene of fireworks being launched into the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. It has become. In the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth pattern Z2 is variably displayed.

(B) in FIG. 52: After the end of the jackpot game, the first variation (at the time of non-winning) is completed, and all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“3”-“1”-“7”). ”). Also, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-win mode (for example, white display color).

(C) in FIG. 52: When the next variation is started, the second variation display is performed after the end of the big win game. In the fireworks rush (high-probability time reduction state), the operation of the variable start-up winning device 28 is performed at high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit the right hand, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol Variable display is often performed. Also, when a winning result is obtained in the fireworks rush, a ready-to-win effect is executed and a big win is achieved.

In the fireworks rush, as in the normal mode, the before-change display area X1 and the during-change display area X2 may be displayed, and the marker M1 and the marker M2 may be displayed. This point also applies to the following coast mode.

[Daily role production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 53 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the production during the big role executed during the big hit game when "6 round probability variation pattern 1" or "6 round probability variation pattern 2" is applied.

[1 round]
(A) in FIG. 53: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, the effect during the jackpot of contents corresponding to the state of progress of the game is executed. In the production during the big role, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 1" is displayed on the screen. Also, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect pattern corresponding to the winning pattern of this time (in this case, the effect pattern of 2) is displayed. In this way, by continuing to display winning symbols (so-called ``remaining eyes'') even during the big winning game, it is possible to continuously inform the player of the information ``won with 2 performance symbols''. In the lower area of the display screen, the characters "Normal Bonus" are displayed, and festival-related images such as fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 53 (B): In the case of winning with "6 round probability variable pattern 1" or "6 round probability variable pattern 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter a fireworks rush, which is a high probability time reduction state. Specifically, an effect is executed in which a female character utters a line such as "Aim for the V-attacker." As a result, it is possible to convey the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. Also, in the 6th round when "6 round probability variable pattern 1" or "6 round probability variable pattern 2" is won, the probability variable area solenoid 99 operates to long open the probability variable area, so the second variable winning device 31 , the game ball passes through the probability variable region while being guided by the probability variable region blade member 31d.

(C) in FIG. 53: When the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31 and passes through the probability variable area as a result of the player continuing to hit to the right, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is executed.

[At the end of the big role]
(D) in FIG. 53: At the timing when the jackpot game ends, a big win ending effect is executed to teach the internal state to be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big win ending effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" firework rush as a privilege after the big win game ends.

[Daily role production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 54 is a series of diagrams partially showing an example of the effect during the big role executed during the big hit game when the "10 round probability variable pattern" is applied.

[1 round]
(A) in FIG. 54: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, the effect during the jackpot is executed with contents corresponding to the progress of the game, ie, "during jackpot". In the production during the big role, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 1" is displayed on the screen. Also, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect pattern corresponding to the winning pattern of this time (in this case, the effect pattern of 7) is displayed. In this way, by continuing to display winning symbols (so-called ``remaining eyes'') even during the big winning game, it is possible to continuously inform the player of the information that ``you won with 7 performance symbols''. Also, in the lower area of the display screen, the characters "Special Bonus" are displayed, and around the screen is displayed an image of a female character straddling a horse and making a peace sign.

[6 rounds]
(B) in FIG. 54: In the case of winning in the “10 round probability variable pattern”, the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter a fireworks rush, which is a high probability time reduction state. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for the V-attacker!". As a result, it is possible to convey the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. In addition, in the sixth round when the "10 round probability variable pattern" is won, the probability variable area solenoid 99 operates to open the probability variable area for a long time, so when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game The ball passes through the variable probability region while being guided by the variable probability region blade member 31d.

(C) in FIG. 54: When the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31 and passes through the probability variable area as the player continues to hit to the right, a V mark appears next to the female character who has jumped up. The displayed blessing production is executed.

[10 rounds]
(D) in FIG. 54: After this, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and when the final 10 rounds are entered, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 10" is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is in progress. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect pattern (the effect pattern of 7) as the "remaining eyes" is still displayed.

[At the end of the big role]
(E) in FIG. 54: At the timing when the jackpot game ends, a big win ending effect is executed to teach the internal state to be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big win ending effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" firework rush as a privilege after the big win game ends.

[Example of coastal mode]
FIG. 55 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect. This coast mode is a jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to the "8 round normal pattern" or when the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area during the jackpot game even though it corresponds to one of the probability variable patterns. This is the mode to be shifted to after the end of . Coast mode is a "low-probability time reduction state". The flow of production will be explained step by step below.

(A) in FIG. 55: For example, after the jackpot game with "8 rounds of normal symbols" is completed, the first variable display is performed, and the variable display of the effect symbols is performed in the "coast mode" state. there is The background image of the coast mode is a background image with a motif of images such as "sand beach", "sea", "mountain", etc., in order to express the impression of healing that is the concept of the coast mode. In the upper right corner of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth pattern Z2 is variably displayed.

(B) in FIG. 55: By the end of this variation (when not winning), all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“1”-“1”-“5”). Also, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-win mode (for example, white display color).

(C) in FIG. 55: Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbols fluctuate 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode of the low-probability non-time reduction state. In addition, when a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a ready-to-win effect is executed to give a big hit.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, memory display effect, important role during effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control processing executed by the effect control device 124 .

[Production control processing]
The effect control device 124 has a function as a effect control processor and a function as a effect reproduction processor as described above, and realizes these two functions by allocating different resources of the effect control CPU 126 to each. . The effect control CPU 126 as a effect control processor receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70 and sets various control tables for instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the content of the command. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 as the effect reproduction processor analyzes the control table set by the effect control processor, and based on the contents, gives more specific instructions to each device to operate each device (liquid crystal display screen display by device 42, sound output by speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, board surface lamp 53, etc., displacement of various movable bodies by movable body motor 57, etc.) Realize the performance playback in

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the subject of action when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor is expressed as the "effect control unit 210", and the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect display processor. Depending on the content, the main body of operation in each case is appropriately expressed as the “display control unit 220,” the “audio control unit 222,” the “lamp control unit 224,” or the “motor control unit 226.”

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. As shown in FIG. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from reset start (main) process (not shown), for example. The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The production control process includes command reception processing (step S400), error production management processing (step S400a), operating memory production management processing (step S401), production design management processing (step S402), display output processing (step S404), input It includes a subroutine group of control processing (step S405), lamp driving processing (step S406), sound driving processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410) and other processing (step S412). The basic flow of the effect control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU72. In addition, the effect control section 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. In addition, the production commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special figure destination judgment production command, (special symbol) production command when the number of working memories increases, (special pattern) production command when the number of working memories decreases, starting entrance winning sound Control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop pattern command, confirmation command, state designation command, round number command, various error commands, jackpot end effect command, counter value command , variation pattern destination determination command, stop display time end command, probability variable region passing command, prize content command, setting related end designation command, and the like.

Step S400a: In the error effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing an error effect based on various error commands (error effect execution means).

Step S401: In the operation storage effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls execution of the memory display effect and the pre-reading announcement effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and when the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened and closed. (effect execution means). Also, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-notice effect before occurrence of reach, notice effect after occurrence of reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404: In the display output process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends the display control unit 220 to the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the working memory effect pattern number, the pre-reading notice Effect pattern number, variable effect pattern number, variable notice effect number, background pattern number, relevant pending deletion, etc.) and set a control table. In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives specific drawing instructions to the VDP 152 based on the set message and the contents of the control table, and controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 .

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the effect control unit 210 synchronizes with the scene in which the player's operation is requested as the effect progresses, and the operation member such as the operation unit 60 is moved to the input control unit 228 by the player. Instructs to detect whether or not the device is operated in a specified manner. More specifically, the effect control section 210 sets one of the input control tables predefined in the control ROM 180 . In response to this, the input control unit 228 analyzes the contents of the set input control table, and based on this, sets a period during which it is possible to accept operations on any of the operation members. Also, it detects whether or not an operation (an operation requested to the player) matching the mode specified by the effect control unit 210 is performed, outputs the detection result, and returns it to the effect control unit 210 .

Step S<b>406 : In the lamp driving process, the effect control section 210 first sets a control table for instructing the content of the effect to the lamp control section 224 . In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the contents of the set control table, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and outputs various lamps 46 to 52, board surface lamp 53, A light source or the like built in each part of the operation unit 60 is driven (turned on or off, blinked, changed in luminance gradation, etc.).

Step S<b>408 : In the sound driving process, the effect control section 210 first sets a control table for instructing the content of the effect to the sound control section 222 . In response to this, the sound control unit 222 instructs the sound IC 134 to output specific contents based on the contents of the set control table, and the sound ( sound effects, BGM, etc.).

Step S410: In effect random number update processing, the effect control section 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. FIG. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for advance notice selection, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control unit 210 first sets a control table for instructing the motor control unit 226 on the content of the effect. In response to this, the motor control unit 226 instructs the SMC 199 on specific control contents based on the contents of the set control table. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern for the movable body 40f based on instructions from the motor control section 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to this pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronization with image display by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-described effect control processing, the effect control section 210 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1 .

[Working memory presentation management processing]
FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage effect management process.
In the working memory performance management process, the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 are interlocked with the increase or decrease in the number of lottery elements stored in the main controller 70 (number of working memories). This is a process of updating the display of the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to (memory display effect execution means), and is called and executed in the process of effect control processing (step S401 in FIG. 56). An example procedure will be described below.

Step S700: First, the production control unit 210 confirms whether or not the production command for increasing the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the production command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control unit 210 executes step S702. In addition, when it cannot be confirmed that the production|presentation command at the time of the increase in working memory number is preserve|saved (step S700: No), the production|presentation control part 210 does not perform step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is increased. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect of displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of reduction of the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories decreases (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. In addition, when it cannot confirm that the production|presentation command is preserve|saved at the time of the working memory number reduction|decrease (step S704: No), the production|presentation control part 210 does not perform step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 produces an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and changes the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1. An effect to be moved to the middle display area X2 is selected. It should be noted that the memory marker moved to the display area X2 during fluctuation selects an effect to be erased at the end of fluctuation.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 56).

[Production pattern management process]
FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of production symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and when the variable winning device is in operation. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). The basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not yet started, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display process (step S506) is selected. In addition, the variable winning device operation time processing (step S508) is performed when the main control CPU 72 selects the variable winning device management processing at the time of the big hit (step S5000 in FIG. 24) or the variable winning device management processing at the time of the small hit (step S5000 in FIG. 24) (step S6000) is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs the work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In addition, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the contents of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.) Pre-reach warning pattern, post-reach warning pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control section 210 also controls a demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control unit 210 generates control information to instruct the display control unit 220 as necessary. For example, when a performance using the operation unit 60 is performed during execution of a variable display performance using performance symbols, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and responds according to the result. The display control unit 220 is instructed to control information on the content of effects (operation opportunity effects, repeated hit effects, linked operation effects, etc.).

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control unit 210 instructs the display control unit 220 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the display control unit 220 terminates the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 via the VDP 152, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronism with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect). means). It should be noted that, at the time of the small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is activated, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect executing means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the contents of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, when winning the "10 round probability variable pattern", the effect control unit 210 selects the effect pattern during the 10 rounds as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the display control unit 220 to do so. do. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays the image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Production pattern change pre-processing]
FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S600: The production control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demonstration production command has been received from the main control CPU72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes demonstration selection processing. In this process, the effect control section 210 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the following display output process (step S404 in FIG. 56) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 56), the content of the demonstration effect is changed based on the demonstration effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the change of this time is lost (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control section 210 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not this time's variation is lost based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the lost normal variation or the lost reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (lost) (step S604: No), then the effect control section 210 confirms whether or not this change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big win is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control section 210 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of the small win remains, so in this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. . It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is a big hit based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is the big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big win symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big win.

Step S608: The production control unit 210 executes a small hit fluctuation production pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, "C0H00H" to "D0H7FH") received from the main control CPU72. The production pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the production control unit 210 refers to a production pattern selection table (not shown) to select the production pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. can be done. Incidentally, the effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Also, when the production pattern number is selected, the production control unit 210 refers to a production table (not shown), and the fluctuation schedule of the production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation production pattern number at that time (variation time, reach type and reach generation timing), Determine the mode of stop display, etc. It should be noted that all the types of performance symbols determined here correspond to the "combination of symbols at the time of a small win".

The above procedure is for the case of a "minor hit", but if it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control section 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control section 210 executes a variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU72. In the big-hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be branched according to the big-hit stop symbol.

In addition, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the production control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), then step S612 is executed.

Step S612: The production control unit 210 executes a variation production pattern selection process when losing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of failure based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU72. The effect pattern number at the time of losing is classified into "normal loss fluctuation", "short time loss fluctuation", "loss reach fluctuation", etc. Further, a detailed reach fluctuation pattern is specified for "loss reach fluctuation". It should be noted that which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 .

When the performance pattern number at the time of loss is selected, the performance control unit 210 refers to a performance table (not shown) and determines the variation schedule of the performance pattern corresponding to the variable performance pattern number at that time (variation time, presence or absence of reach occurrence, reach occurrence If so, determine the type of reach and the timing of occurrence of reach), and the mode of stop display (eg, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.).

After executing any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612, the effect control unit 210 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the notice selection process (prediction effect executing means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects by lottery the details of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or not winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The advance notice effect notifies the player of the possibility of occurrence of a ready-to-win state during the variable display effect, or of the possibility of a big win in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the announcement effect is set low when the game is not won, but the selection ratio of the announcement effect is set relatively high when the game is won in order to raise the player's expectation.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes mode effect management processing. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the "normal mode (low-probability non-reduced time state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image of a female character sitting on a couch. Moreover, when the stay mode is the “fireworks mode (high-probability time reduction state)”, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image with fireworks as a motif. Furthermore, when the stay mode is the "coast mode (low-probability time reduction state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image with a coast motif. In addition, when the stay mode is the "high probability non-reduced time state", the effect control unit 210 may select a background image corresponding to the normal mode, or may select a background image different from the normal mode. good.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent production pattern fluctuation process (step S504 in FIG. 58), the variable display production and the stop display production are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation production pattern (production execution means), various A notice performance is executed based on the notice performance pattern.

[Processing when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device activation processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device activation processing (step S906), and variable winning device activation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the process when the variable winning device is activated will be described along with each process.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S904 to S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device activation process to the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device pre-operation processing has not yet started, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device pre-operation processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Also, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device in-operation processing (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the processing during variable winning device operation is completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device activation pre-processing, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning with the "8 round normal pattern", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. In addition, in the case of winning with "8 round probability variable symbols 1, 2", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning with "6 round probability variable symbols 1, 2", a process of selecting a normal bonus effect is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning in the "10 round probability variable pattern", a process of selecting a special bonus effect is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control section 210 generates control information for instructing the display control section 220 as necessary. For example, when an effect using the operation unit 60 is performed during execution of a big hit effect, the input control unit 228 detects whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and the effect content (operation opportunity effect) according to the result , consecutive hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220 . Also, in this process during operation of the variable winning device, when a probability variable area passing command is received during a big hit game, an effect indicating that a V prize has occurred (an effect shown in (J) in FIG. 50, etc.) is selected. While executing the process, when the probability variable area passing command is not received during the big hit game, the process of selecting the effect (effect shown in (N) etc. in FIG. 51) indicating that the V prize has not occurred to run.

Step S908: In the variable winning device activation post-processing, the effect control section 210 executes the effect of transmitting the destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes a coast mode entry effect or a firework rush rush effect depending on whether or not there is a winning symbol or passage through a variable probability area. Specifically, when a probability variable area passing command is received during a big hit game, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in (K) etc. in FIG. 50) indicating entering into a fireworks rush is executed, and a big hit is performed. When the variable probability area passing command is not received during the game, the process of selecting the effect (the effect shown in (G) etc. in FIG. 49) indicating entering the coast mode is executed.
After completing the above processing, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 58).

As described above, according to this embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the ground pattern 800 is arranged at least partly around specific signal lines (signal lines 700 for transmitting high-speed signals and signal lines 710 for transmitting important signals). Therefore, it is possible not only to make it difficult for other signal lines to be affected by noise emitted by a specific signal line, but also to make a specific signal line less susceptible to the influence of noise emitted by other signal lines. , it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to be affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise in the elements that constitute the circuit.

(2) According to the present embodiment, since the width X of the ground pattern 800 is equal to or wider than the width Y of the specific signal line, the width X of the ground pattern 800 is equal to or wider than the width Y of the specific signal line. Influence of noise can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the line width is narrower than Y.

(3) According to the present embodiment, it is possible to protect the signal line or the like, which has a high degree of importance, so that the quality of the gaming machine can be improved.

(4) Anti-noise measures are essential for game machines used in game arcades. By surrounding a specific signal line with a ground pattern, it is possible to protect the quality of the specific signal line with high importance and to suppress the influence on other signal lines.

In the present embodiment, a ground pattern (ground guard) is placed (or wiring).
Certain signal lines are particularly important, and have a high frequency clock signal that is a source of noise, a command data signal that has a high update frequency, and the inclusion of noise, etc., has a large impact on the entire system (update frequency is low). A signal line through which a reset signal or the like passes can be used. The width of the ground pattern 800 is approximately the same as the width of a specific signal line or the size of the via hole 810 (preferably greater than the width). This makes it possible to make other signal lines less likely to be affected by noise emitted by a specific signal line, or to make a specific signal line less likely to be affected by noise emitted by other signal lines.

(5) As a conventional technology, there may be a technology that uses ground as a concept. However, there is no technology that surrounds the signal line with a ground pattern instead of the ground terminal as in the present embodiment. In addition, there is no technology that encloses a specific signal line associated with importance and update frequency with a ground pattern as in the present embodiment. In other words, the configuration of this embodiment cannot be derived from the prior art in that it digs down to which signal line is associated with the ground pattern.

(6) According to this embodiment, since the damping resistor 920 is arranged in the wiring 700 through which high-speed signals are transmitted, the electromagnetic influence on other wirings and other circuits can be suppressed as much as possible. It is possible to prevent malfunction of the entire circuit of the game machine and ensure stable operation. can.

(7) According to the present embodiment, the distance L1 from the output IC 900 to the damping resistor 920 is shorter than the distance L2 from the receiver IC 910 to the damping resistor 920 (L1<L2), so the damping resistor 920 is effective. It is possible to shorten the portion where it is difficult to generate noise and lengthen the portion where the effect of the damping resistor 920 is likely to occur, thereby efficiently suppressing the influence of noise.

(8) In board circuit design, it is known that high-speed signals such as clocks and image signals generally have large overshoots and undershoots, and have a large effect on peripheral circuits as noise. Excessive overshoot and undershoot not only lead to damage to the receiver IC, but also cause propagation delay due to reflection.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the impedance of the signal line 700 (transmission line) is adjusted to reduce overshoot and undershoot within a range in which the rise and fall of high-speed signals such as clocks and image signals are not significantly delayed. . Impedance adjustment is performed by arranging a damping resistor 920 (component for adjustment) on the signal line 700 . The damping resistor 920 has a relationship between the distance L1 from the output side IC 900 (or its terminal) that outputs the signal to the damping resistor 920 and the distance L2 from the receiving side IC 910 (or its terminal) that receives the signal to the damping resistor 920. , L1<L2. The pattern width of the signal line 700 is preferably 0.3 mm or more, and the length of the signal line 700 is preferably the shortest possible range. The signal line 700 is guarded by the ground pattern 800. is preferred. As a result, the electromagnetic influence on other circuits on the board can be suppressed as much as possible, and malfunction of the entire circuit on the board can be prevented, and stable operation can be ensured. In addition, damage to the IC can be prevented, and delay of high-speed signals can also be prevented.

(9) As a conventional technique, there is no technique for suppressing radiation noise by a damping resistor (circuit element). In other words, one of the characteristics of this embodiment, "When adjusting the impedance of a high-speed signal transmission line (specific signal line), an IC (or its terminal) that outputs a signal and a component for adjustment (a damping resistor ) and the distance L2 between the IC (or its terminal) that receives the signal and the component for adjustment, place the damping resistor near the IC on the output side so that L1<L2.” feature cannot be derived by a person skilled in the art.

The present invention can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of presentation and various numerical values given in one embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the contents described above.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine having a variable probability region has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a variable probability region. It is also possible to apply the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine.

The present invention is applicable not only to pachinko machines but also to slot machines.
Although the circuit element has been described as a damping resistor, it may be a noise filter or a ferrite bead.

The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and can be appropriately modified. Also, the structure, board configuration, and specific numerical values of the pachinko machine 1, including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and these can be modified as appropriate.

FIG. 61 is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. Also, FIG. 62 is a rear view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. In addition, in the following description, basically, the same description as in the above-described embodiment is omitted, but some parts are redundantly described. Further, regarding the reference numerals in the drawings, some portions are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the above-described embodiment, and other portions are provided with different reference numerals. A major difference between the above-described embodiment and other embodiments is that a decoration unit having a different shape is attached to the upper front portion of the pachinko machine of other embodiments. A pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described below.

The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. can be converted into a game value based on the number of The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

Here, in this specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated facing the pachinko machine 1 is defined as left, the right side as viewed from the player is defined as right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is defined as up. The lower side viewed from the player is referred to as the bottom, the near side viewed from the player is referred to as the front, and the back side viewed from the player is referred to as the rear.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. When the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side disables the opening of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the lock. .

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7, for example, with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (game area where game balls flow down, board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

[Structure of ball plate]
The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores the game balls that have been put out while the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are received from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6c) is paid out.

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit is displayed on this frequency display section. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. Although the example of the model connected to the card unit is described in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

On the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is provided in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. In addition, the player can drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by pushing the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e backward. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . A player can operate the shooting control board set 174 by operating the handle unit 16 to shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The configuration inside the game area 8a will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper side of the tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate an upper glass frame speaker 54, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each incorporate an in-glass frame speaker 55. is built in. On the other hand, an inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and an outer frame speaker 56 is installed in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, and 58 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

[Operation member]
An operation unit 60 (operating means) is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 so as to protrude from the upper tray 6b toward the upper front side. The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in its central portion and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64 . The operation unit 60 is capable of receiving operations in various scenes shown on the production. The player pulls the handle lever 62 toward the front side in one scene of the performance, and pushes the push button 64 in another scene. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbols are changing, the big win is being confirmed, or the big win is being displayed. During the game, it is possible to generate some kind of effects (announcement effects, variable probability promotion effects, promotion effects during big roles, etc.).

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64 . Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped part 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pull-in operation of the handle lever 62. As shown in FIG. In addition, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells that are separated at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These cells cannot be operated by the player, but they are effectively used to inform the player of the operation method.

When the player is requested to perform some kind of operation, a reduced image representing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . At this time, each cell of the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if it were a lamp, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (effective operation time). be. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. When the remaining time runs out, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on/off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced image displayed on the screen. By switching the lighting/lighting out of the portion 65 in this manner, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is structured so as to protrude greatly upward when a predetermined trigger occurs during the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it protrudes to a height approximately three times higher than normal. Push button 64 has a light source therein. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or in multiple colors, but when it is protruding, it can emit more colorful light to exhibit a strong presence. Such an operation of the push button 64 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

Although the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60 in this embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Moreover, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a directional key 66 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation section 14 . The direction key 66 is composed of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions arranged in a cross shape, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the effect.

[Decoration unit]
A decoration unit 800 is attached to the front upper portion of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁The decoration unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined attachment member (mechanical mechanism such as screws and hooks). Note that the decoration unit 800 may be one that cannot be removed from the pachinko machine 1 .
The decoration unit 800 (decoration) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decoration unit 800 is a cubic member on which predetermined character information is displayed. luminous.

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 62, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176, and a back cover. A unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main controller in a visible manner in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments that can display decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located on the lower right of the 7 segments. It is Performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM, that is, for initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main control device, and in this embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required to change or refer to the game setting of the pachinko machine 1 .

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

The positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the keyhole 306 for setting keys are merely examples, and can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be arranged outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). , can store game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, hall computer, etc.). and various external information signals representing maintenance status etc. .

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 63 is a front view showing a single game board unit 8 of another embodiment. The game board unit 8 has a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a substantially circular launch rail (no reference numeral). The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁The left part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (jackpot game state, small winning game state, low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state, etc.) is the second game area (right hitting area R, specific area) used in. The left portion of the game area 8a is also used in the high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a. Here, the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the right side (upper right) of the middle starting winning port 26 , and the first variable winning device 30 is arranged above the second variable winning device 31 . Furthermore, the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the single normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged at the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. there is

A game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters a middle starting prize winning port 26 and normal winning prize ports 22 and 24 in the process of flowing down, passes through a starting gate 20, and is a variable starting prize winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter mainly the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the starting gate 20, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball will enter, the ball will enter the second variable prize winning device 31 during the opening operation, or the ball will enter the normal prize winning opening 24. - 特許庁The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but there are a middle starting winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning opening. A game ball entered into the device 31 is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a game board (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. that constitute the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the left side area (left-handed hitting) in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "left hit") in the area).

On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the variable start-up winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right side of the game area 8a (right-handed area ) (executing the so-called “right-handed hitting”).

In this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, the right start It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole 28a (predetermined ball entry hole) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start-up winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening/closing member 28b. In the illustrated state, the opening/closing member 28b is in a position (retreat position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning hole 28a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 28b moves to the position (driving position) where the opening/closing member 28b protrudes forward from the board surface, the opening/closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right It becomes possible or easier for the ball to enter the start winning opening 28a). The variable start-up winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start-up prize opening by displacing the opening/closing member so as to fall forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge.

The first variable winning device 30, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win), a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big win game) 5th round or 7th round to 10th round condition, condition that the small winning game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning hole 30b. Make it (special electric accessory, first special entry event generating means).

The first variable prize winning device 30 is a device (upper attacker) arranged below the variable starting prize winning device 28, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the first big prize winning port 30b cannot be won (the first big prize winning port 30b is closed). be. When the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right side with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not disabled, and an event of winning into the first big winning hole 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b. A game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30b passes through the first count switch 84 and is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a recovery passage (no reference numeral) after the winning is detected.

The second variable winning device 31, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode), is a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the jackpot game). condition) is satisfied, and allows the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b (specific winning hole) (special electric accessory, second special winning ball event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device (lower attacker) arranged below the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is of a type in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is impossible or difficult (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible (possible or easy), and can generate the event of the ball entering the second big winning hole 31b.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guiding passage 31c for guiding a game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guiding path 31c extends leftward and downward from the second big prize winning opening 31b and branches into two at the tip.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a variable probability region blade member 31d and a variable probability region hole 31e are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge area) is arranged on the lower left side of 31c.

A game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is first detected by the second count switch 85 as entering. Here, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted further from the board surface, and the game ball is guided to the probability variable area hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruded to the front side from the board surface, so that the game The ball passes through the upper portion of the blade member 31d for the variable probability region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probable variable area (specific area)]
Further, a variable probability region (no reference numeral) is provided inside the variable probability region hole 31e. The variable probability area is an area through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the blade member 31d for the variable probability region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

There is a possibility that the variable probability area blade member 31d will operate during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the variable probability region blade member 31d opens the variable probability region for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closes the variable probability region for a long period of time after closing it for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds). Apply either a long open pattern that opens long (for example, about 20 seconds) or a short open pattern that only opens the probability variable area for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the start of the round. . Which operation pattern to operate the variable probability area blade member 31d can be selected according to the winning pattern. Specifically, a long open pattern for long opening the probability variable area is selected when the probability variable pattern is won, and a short open pattern for short opening the probability variable area is selected when the normal pattern is won.

In addition, the operation pattern of the probability variable region blade member 31d applies only the pattern in which the probability variable region blade member 31d opens long, and when the first variable winning device 30 opens short and the round ends, the probability variable region It is also possible to eliminate the opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time. In addition, since the game ball does not reach the variable probability region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the probability variable region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state is shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state after the big win game ends. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (high-probability time-reduction state). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state shifts to a low probability state after the big win game is over. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (low-probability time-reduction state).

A performance unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from its central position to its right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the production unit 40, and various production images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including production patterns corresponding to special patterns. . Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. - 特許庁Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorations (including movable bodies and light-emitting bodies) are arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) can add decorativeness. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42 .

In addition, inside the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, an ornament imitating the shape of a spade). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. The effect using these movable bodies 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the middle starting winning opening 26 directly below it. . At the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, a blade member that is always movable by a solenoid (not shown) is arranged, and at the exit of the ball guide passage 40d, a sorting device that is always movable by a solenoid (not shown) A device for sorting whether to induce or not) may be arranged.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not enter (win a prize) in various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32.例文帳に追加In addition, including the game ball entering the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, is driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that are caught are recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
64 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 61. FIG. FIG. 64 shows a cross section taken along a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end of the game area 8a (the top, the upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)). The cross section shown in FIG. 64 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. Also, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. In addition, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is positioned above the lower end of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500). are doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position indicated by the dashed line Y in FIG. 64).

Further, the protruding portion 856 protrudes downward from the center of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in this state. More specifically, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in this state. Also, the protruding portion 856 protrudes below the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500 .

As is clear from the above, the decoration unit 800 overlaps the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , to cover the entire game ball X in that state. In addition, in the decoration unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a) extends in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , at least the lower half of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a is not overlapped, and at least the lower half of the game ball in this state is not covered. A rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854 . Therefore, even when the game ball is positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily visually recognize the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in this state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically from the player's eye point, without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. A player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when playing a game while sitting on a chair. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a portion of the game ball in this state is maintained without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. (Lower half) should be visible. That is, the decoration unit 800 is arranged on a straight line from a predetermined point at a distance of less than 50 to 90 cm from the glass unit G to the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a (the part below the center of the game ball X). It should be designed so that it does not get wet.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) Equipped with a front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) on the upper part and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8). It is a game machine that has
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) Above the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right hitting area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (an outer peripheral surface 502, the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (an inner peripheral surface 504, the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Among the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(7) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The game ball has a diameter of about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can.
In addition, even though the design part is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball is hit strongly (the game ball passage ), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending perpendicular to the game board surface, the portion located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the portion on the right side of point B, the portion on the left side of point B, the portion that will be point B ) is defined as a second reference line L2.
(11) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(12) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can. In addition, even though the design portion is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design portion D1 to be equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is weakly launched (the game ball path When the game ball rolls along the bottom surface of the), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure.

[Arrangement of positioning holes in the outer rail]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail and a rail base. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing how a game ball contacts the outer rail. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 65, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-like horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the mounting position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined. Hole 602 is smaller in size than guide 601 .

A distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end of the outer rail 600 (lower end in the drawing) is set to 2.7 mm. In other words, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where a game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit it. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where game balls rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 do not hit.

As shown in FIG. 66, a rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, and a curved outer rail 600 is arranged on a curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. As shown in FIG. A plurality of projecting portions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601 .

As shown in FIG. 67, the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 . The projecting portion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into the predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600 , thereby positioning the outer rail 600 on the rail base 700 . Here, the projecting portion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 68, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, from the starting end (PS) of the lower left outer rail 600, through the left end (PL) of the left outer rail 600, to the upper It is curved to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the upper right outer rail 600 .

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has predetermined guide portions 601 (many holes for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for attaching positioning pins, cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701) for guiding the mounting position to the game board. are formed. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined.
(3) In the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 to the upper end (PU) is defined as a second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater in the first range (H1) (eg, 3) than in the second range (H2) (eg, 2), and is larger than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the side of the ball launching device, which receives a large impact from the game ball and requires particularly accurate placement of the outer rail 600, and the deviation of the outer rail 600 on the side of the ball launching device is prevented. and vibration can be reliably prevented.
In addition, a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the end side of the outer rail 600, which receives less impact from the game ball and has less influence on the game, so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), and the third number in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(6) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the third range (H3) in the first range (H1), and the third range (H2) in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(7) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), range (H3) or more.
(8) Predetermined guide portions 601 are not formed at the upper vertex (PU) and left vertex (PL) of the outer rail 600 .

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game ball does not come into contact (for example, a position away from the trajectory where the game ball contacts).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball is less likely to flow forward.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at uneven intervals.

(13) In place of the above (3) and (4), the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the fourth range (H4 ), and the range from the left end (PL) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a fifth range (H5). number) is larger than the fifth range (H5) (eg, two).
(14) In place of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the starting end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is set to the sixth range (H6 ), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a seventh range (H7), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is within the sixth range (H6) (for example, five ) is larger than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the eighth range (H8 ), and the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is a ninth range (H9), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4 number) is larger than the ninth range (H9) (eg, one number).
By adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized, and the game can be played according to the design value.

The invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail] and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail] may be combined. The invention having the configuration, the invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail], and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail] may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball and playing the game as designed. In addition, by stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the bottom side of the decoration unit.

[Dimensions of the finger hook of the handle]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 0 degrees (minimum angle), and FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 100 degrees (maximum angle).
The handle 950 (firing handle) is a circular member shaped like a dome. The handle 950 has three radially protruding finger hooks 952 (952a, 952b, 952c) around a central circular member.
As shown in FIG. 69, when the handle 950 is not operated, the first finger hook 952a located on the left side of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side of the player's right thumb. When the handle 950 is not operated, the second finger hook 952b located above the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side of the player's right index finger. Furthermore, when the handle 950 is not operated, the third finger hook portion 952c located diagonally to the upper right of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side of the middle finger of the player's right hand.
The handle 950 (operating means) is rotatable (rotatable within the range from the initial position to the maximum position) from the initial position (the position shown in FIG. 69) to the maximum rotation position (the position shown in FIG. 70). The handle 950 is a member operated by the player in order to shoot a game ball into the game area. It is rotatable to a right-handed reference position corresponding to a predetermined position. When the handle 950 is rotated to the left-handed reference position (predetermined reference position), a game ball (game medium) is shot to the left-handed area (first game area), and the handle 950 reaches the right-handed reference position (maximum position), the game ball is shot to the right hitting area (second game area).

A distance D1 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the first finger hook portion 952a is, for example, 53.4 mm.
A distance D2 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the second finger hook portion 952b is, for example, 45.6 mm.
A distance D3 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the third finger hook portion 952c is, for example, 39.3 mm.
A distance E from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the handle 950 is, for example, 34.6 mm.
A distance F from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 40.0 mm. Note that the distance from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 45.0 mm.
A distance G from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 49.1 mm. The distance from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 51.1 mm.
These numerical values are merely examples, and can be appropriately changed according to game specifications and the like.

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) A body frame (front door and middle door) having a front frame (front door, integrated door unit 4) and an inner frame (middle door, inner frame assembly 7), and an outer frame (outer door) to which the body frame can be attached. It is a game machine provided with a frame unit 2).
(2) The body frame has a handle 950 (firing handle, handle unit 16).
(3) The handle 950 has a finger hook portion 952 .
(4) The handle 950 is rotatable from the initial position to the maximum rotation position.
(5) When the handle 950 is at the initial position, the finger hook 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame (the lower edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(6) When the handle 950 is at the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame.

As a result, even when the body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hook portion 952 does not come into contact with the floor or the like, and the handle 950 is not damaged. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of component damage.

(7) The finger hooking portion 952 may not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame at any rotational position of the handle 950 .
(8) When the handle 950 is in the initial position, the finger hook 952 does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the body frame (the right edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(9) When the handle 950 is at the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the body frame.
(10) The finger hook portion 952 may not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the body frame regardless of the rotational position of the handle 950 .
(11) Assuming that the finger hooking portion having the largest protrusion amount is the maximum finger hooking portion (first finger hooking portion 952a), the tip (PT) of the maximum finger hooking portion reaches the lowest point ( PB).

[Handle Torque]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 1).
The torque (operation torque) of the handle in Example 1 is 6.8 N mm required for the initial movement, and 13.6 N mm required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position. The torque required to rotate the handle to the reference position for hitting to the right is 23.8 N·mm. The handle displaced to the right-handed reference position returns to the origin by the reaction force of the spring.

Further, in the handle of Example 1, the displacement amount from the initial position (initial movement) to the left-handed reference position (hereinafter referred to as "displacement amount A") is 6.8, and the left-handed reference position to the right-handed reference position is 6.8. The amount of displacement up to the reference position (hereinafter referred to as "the amount of displacement B") is 10.2. Although not shown, the operation angle to the left-handed reference position is 49.0 degrees, and the operation angle to the right-handed reference position is 100.0 degrees. Regarding the amount of displacement, A<B (6.8<10.2) and 2A>B (13.6>10.2).

As described above, the handle of Example 1 reduces the operation torque required for the initial motion, minimizes the amount of displacement, and flattens the torque curve.

The torque of the steering wheel in the comparative example is 31 Nmm for initial movement, and 69 Nmm for rotating the steering wheel to the reference position for left-handed driving. is 152 N·mm.

Further, in the handle of the comparative example, the displacement amount A is 38 and the displacement amount B is 83. That is, A<B (38<83) but not 2A>B (76<83).

As described above, the steering wheel of the comparative example has a high initial torque and abrupt torque transfer, so that it is very easy for the driver to get tired.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 2).
The torque of the handle in Example 2 is 27.2 Nmm for initial movement, 54.4 Nmm for rotating the handle to the reference position for right-handed hitting. The torque required to rotate the handle to is 95.2 N·mm.

Further, in the handle of Example 2, the displacement amount A is 27.2 and the displacement amount B is 40.8. That is, A<B (27.2<40.8) and 2A>B (54.4>40.8).

Thus, in the handle of Example 2, the operation torque required for the initial movement is slightly larger than that of Example 1, but smaller than that of the comparative example. It is hard to get tired even if you play games.

The torque of the handle of the comparative example is the same as in FIG.

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) The first operation torque (6.8 N·mm) is the operation torque required for the rotation of the handle from the initial position (necessary for the initial movement and for starting the rotation of the handle from the initial position).
(2) The operation torque (required to rotate the handle from the initial position to the left-handed reference position) required to rotate the handle from the initial position to the left-handed reference position (bent position, predetermined reference position) is set to the second The operating torque is assumed to be 13.6 N·mm.
(3) The operation torque required to rotate the handle from the initial position to the maximum rotation position (right-hand reference position, full stroke position, maximum position) (required to rotate the handle from the initial position to the maximum rotation position) The third operation torque is 23.8 N·mm.
(4) The second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque.
(5) The third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque.
(6) The third operating torque is less than or equal to twice the second operating torque.

In this way, since the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small, the operation torque does not increase sharply between the left-handed reference position and the maximum rotation position, and the player can apply the second operation torque. and the third operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(7) Furthermore, the second operation torque is twice or less than the first operation torque.
In this way, since the difference between the first operation torque and the second operation torque is small, the operation torque does not increase sharply between the initial position and the left-handed reference position, and the player can apply the first operation torque. and the second operation torque is felt to be small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(8) A first operation angle (45 to 60 degrees) is defined as an operation angle from the initial position of the handle to the left-handed reference position.
(9) A second operation angle (100 to 120 degrees) is defined as the operation angle from the initial position of the handle to the maximum rotation position.
(10) The first operating angle (eg, 45 degrees) is half or less than the second operating angle (eg, 100 degrees).

By adopting the configuration described in [Handle Torque], it is possible to provide a handle unit that minimizes the operation torque and its movement (displacement) so that the player does not get tired even in long-time right-handed games. The shooting handle (handle operating portion) is structured to return to the origin by a spring, and the player always operates the handle in the opposite direction to the spring reaction force to play the game. By reducing the initial torque of this reaction force and minimizing the amount of movement (displacement), it is possible to provide a handle unit that is less tiring. Specifically, in the first and second embodiments described above, the initial torque is suppressed to the minimum force that can return to the origin, and the torque curve is flattened to realize a handle unit that does not cause fatigue.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the embodiment described above can be combined with the gaming machine of another embodiment. Also, the comparative examples do not constitute prior art.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 16 handle unit 20 starting gate 28 variable starting winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 first special symbol display device 35 second special symbol display device 34a first special Symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display device 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
76 RAM
124 effect control device 126 effect control CPU
130 RAM
210 effect control unit

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area having a first game area and a second game area is formed;
an operating means rotatable within a range from an initial position to a maximum position;
An output-side element provided on the game board for outputting a predetermined signal, a receiving-side element for receiving the predetermined signal, and an electrical connection between the output-side element and the receiving-side element to obtain the predetermined signal. a substrate on which a transmission line for transmitting a signal is mounted,
The transmission line includes:
A circuit element is arranged to reduce noise generated from the transmission line,
the distance from the output side element to the circuit element is shorter than the distance from the receiving side element to the circuit element,
When the operation means is rotated to the predetermined reference position, a game medium is shot to the first game area, and when the operation means is rotated to the maximum position, to the second game area the game medium is fired,
an operation torque required to start rotating the operation means from the initial position as a first operation torque;
an operation torque required to rotate the operation means from the initial position to the predetermined reference position as a second operation torque;
Assuming that an operation torque required to rotate the operation means from the initial position to the maximum position is a third operation torque,
the second operation torque is greater than the first operation torque,
The third operation torque is greater than the second operation torque, is less than or equal to twice the second operation torque, and is more than or equal to twice the first operation torque ,
the operating means requires a second operating angle to rotate from the initial position to the predetermined reference position;
the operating means requires a third operating angle to rotate from the initial position to the maximum position;
A gaming machine , wherein the third operation angle is at least twice as large as the second operation angle .

Images